IPC 323: Section 323 of the Indian Penal Code

Punishment for voluntarily causing hurt

Whoever, except in the case provided for by section 334, voluntarily causes hurt, shall be punished with imprisonment of either description for a term which may extend to one year, or with fine which may extend to one thousand rupees, or with both.

IPC 406: Section 406 of the Indian Penal Code

Punishment for criminal breach of trust

Whoever commits criminal breach of trust shall be punished with imprisonment of either description for a term which may extend to three years, or with fine, or with both.

IPC 233: Section 233 of the Indian Penal Code

Making or selling instrument for counterfeiting coin

Whoever makes or mends, or performs any part of the process of making or mending, or buys, sells or disposes of, any die or instrument, for the purpose of being used, or knowing or having reason to believe that it is intended to be used, for the purpose of counterfeiting coin, shall be punished with imprisonment of either description for a term which may extended to three years, and shall also be liable to fine.

CrPC 144: Section 144 of the Criminal Procedure Code

Power to issue order in urgent cases of nuisance or apprehended danger

  1. In cases where, in the opinion of a District Magistrate, a Sub-divisional Magistrate or any other Executive Magistrate specially empowered by the State Government in this behalf, there is sufficient ground for proceeding under this section and immediate prevention or speedy remedy is desirable, such Magistrate may, by a written order stating the material facts of the case and served in the manner provided by section 134, direct any person to abstain from a certain act or to take certain order with respect to certain property in his possession or under his management, if such Magistrate considers that such direction is likely to prevent, or tends to prevent, obstruction, annoyance or injury to any person lawfully employed, or danger to human life, health or safely, or a disturbance of the public tranquility, or a riot, or an affray.
  2. An order under this section may, in cases of emergency or in cases where the circumstances do not admit of the serving in due lime of a notice upon the person against whom the order is directed, be passed Ex-parte.
  3. An order under this section may be directed to a particular individual, or to persons residing in a particular place or area, or to the public generally when frequenting or visiting a particular place or area.
  4. No order under this section shall remain in force for more than two months from the making thereof;
    Provided that, if the State Government considers it necessary so to do for preventing danger to human life, health or safety or for preventing a riot or any affray, it may, by notification, direct that an order made by a Magistrate under this section shall remain in force for such further period not exceeding six months from the date on which the order made by the Magistrate would have, but for such order, expired, as it may specify in the said notification.
  5. Any Magistrate may, either on his own motion or on the application of any person aggrieved, rescind or alter any order made under this section, by himself or any Magistrate subordinate to him or by his predecessor-in-office.
  6. The State Government may, either on its own motion or on the application of any person aggrieved, rescind or alter any order made by it under the proviso to Sub-Section (4).
  7. Where an application under Sub-Section (5), or Sub-Section (6) is received, the Magistrate, or the State Government, as the case may be, shall afford to the applicant an early opportunity of appearing before him or it, either in person or by pleader and showing cause against the order, and if the Magistrate or the State Government, as the case may be, rejects the application wholly or in part, he or it shall record in writing the reasons for so doing.

CrPC 125: Section 125 of the Criminal Procedure Code

Order for maintenance of wives, children, and parents

  1. If any person having sufficient means neglects or refuses to maintain.-
    1. his wife, unable to maintain herself, or
    2. his legitimate or illegitimate minor child, whether married or not, unable to maintain itself, or
    3. his legitimate or illegitimate child (not being a married daughter) who has attained majority, where such child is, by reason of any physical or mental abnormality or injury unable to maintain itself, or
    4. his father or mother, unable to maintain himself or herself,
      A Magistrate of the first class may, upon proof of such neglect or refusal, order such person to make a monthly allowance for the maintenance of his wife or such child, father or mother, at such monthly rate as such magistrate thinks fit, and to pay the same to such person as the Magistrate may from time to time direct: Provided that the Magistrate may order the father of a minor female child referred to in clause (b) to make such allowance, until she attains her majority, if the Magistrate is satisfied that the husband of such minor female child, if married, is not possessed of sufficient means. Provided further that the Magistrate may, during the pendency of the proceeding regarding monthly allowance for the maintenance under this Sub-Section, order such person to make a monthly allowance for the interim maintenance of his wife or such child, father or mother, and the expenses of such proceeding which the Magistrate considers reasonable, and to pay the same to such person as the Magistrate may from time to time direct: Provided also that an application for the monthly allowance for the interim maintenance and expenses of proceeding under the second proviso shall, as far as possible, be disposed of within sixty days from the date of the service of notice of the application to such person.”; Explanation – For the purposes of this Chapter- a) “minor” means a person who, under the provisions of the Indian Majority Act, 1875 (9 of 1875) is deemed not to have attained his majority; b) “wife” includes a woman who has been divorced by, or has obtained a divorce from, her husband and has not remarried.
  2. “Any such allowance for the maintenance or interim maintenance and expenses of proceeding shall be payable from the date of the order, or, if so ordered, from the date of the application for maintenance or interim maintenance and expenses of proceeding, as the case may be.”;
  3. If any person so ordered fails without sufficient cause to comply with the order, any such Magistrate may, for every breach of the order, issue a warrant for levying the amount due in the manner provided for levying fines, and may sentence such person, for the whole, or any port of each month’s allowance allowance for the maintenance or the interim maintenance and expenses of proceeding, as the case may be remaining unpaid after the execution of the warrant, to imprisonment for a term which may extend to one month or until payment if sooner made: Provided that no warrant shall be issued for the recovery of any amount due under this section unless application be made to the Court to levy such amount within a period of one year from the date on which it became due: Provided further that if such person offers to maintain his wife on condition of her living with him, and she refuses to live with him, such Magistrate may consider any grounds of refusal stated by her, and may make an order under this section notwithstanding such offer, if he is satisfied that there is just ground for so doing. Explanation – If a husband has contracted marriage with another woman or keeps a mistress, it shall be considered to be just ground for his wife’s refusal to live with him.
  4. No wife shall be entitled to receive an allowance for the maintenance or the interim maintenance and expenses of proceeding, as the case may be from her husband under this section if she is living in adultery, or if, without any sufficient reason, she refuses to live with her, husband, or if they are living separately by mutual consent.
  5. On proof that any wife in whose favour an order has been made under this section is living in adultery, or that without sufficient reason she refuses to live with her husband, or that they are living separately by mutual consent, the Magistrate shall cancel the order.

Indian Contract Act

Preliminary

1. Short title

This Act may be called the Indian Contract Act, 1872.

Extent, Commencement. -It extends to the whole of India 1[except the State of Jammu and Kashmir]; and it shall come into force on the first day of September 1872.

Saving.- 2[* * *] Nothing herein contained shall affect the provisions of any Statute, Act or Regulation not hereby expressly repealed, nor any usage or custom of trade, nor any incident of any contract, not inconsistent with the provisions of this Act.

1. Subs. by Act 3 of 1951, sec. 3 and Sch., for “except Part B States”.

2. The words “The enactments mentioned in the Schedule hereto are repealed to the extent specified in the third column thereof, but” rep. by Act 10 of 1914, sec. 3 and Sch. 11.

2. Interpretation

In this Act the following words and expressions are used in the following senses, unless contrary intention appears from the context:

(a) When one person signifies to another his willingness to do or to abstain from doing anything, with a view to obtaining the assent of that other to such act or abstinence, he is said to make a proposal;

(b) When a person to whom the proposal is made, signifies his assent thereto, the proposal is said to be accepted. A proposal, when a accepted, becomes a promise;

(c) The person making the proposal is called the “promisor”, and the person accepting the proposal is called “promisee”,

(d) When, at the desire of the promisor, the promisee or any other person has done or abstained from doing, or does or abstains from doing, or promises to do or to abstain from doing, something, such act or abstinence or promise is called a consideration for the promise;

(e) Every promise and every set of promises, forming the consideration for each other, is an agreement;

(f) Promises which form the consideration or part of the consideration for each other, are called reciprocal promises;

(g) An agreement not enforceable by law is said to be void;

(h) An agreement enforceable by law is a contract;

(i) An agreement which is enforceable by law at the option of one or more of the parties thereto, but not at the option of the other or others, is a voidable contract;

(j) A contract which ceases to be enforceable by law becomes void when it ceases to be enforceable.

At the desire of the promisor

Suit would lie for the recovery of a promised subscription where on the faith of the promisee, the promiser entered into a contract with a contractor; Kedarnath Bhattacharji v. Gorie Mohomed, (1886) ILR 14 Cal 64.

Consideration and motive

A promise founded on motive of generosity, prudence and natural duty is a promise without consideration; Abdul Aziz v. Masum Ali, (1914) ALJR 36 All 268.

Contract

A contract comes into existence only when all the terms and conditions have been finalised. If the facts of a particular case show that execution of a written contract was a condition precedent for coming into force of the contract between the parties, then it cannot be said that any concluded contract in absence of a written contract being executed has come into force between the parties; J.K. Industries Ltd. v. Mohan Investments and Properties Pvt. Ltd., AIR 1992 Del 305.

Proposal: Offer and statement of intention

The proposal when accepted gives rise to an agreement. It is at this stage that the agreement is reduced into writing and a formal document is executed on which parties affix their signature or thumb impression so as to be bound by the terms of the agreement set out in that document. Such an agreement has to be lawful; Tarsem Singh v. Sukhmider Singh, AIR 1998 SC 1400.

Valid consideration

The consideration should be something which not only the parties regard but the law can also regard as having some value. It must be real and not illusory, whether adequate or not; Chidambara v. P.S. Renga, AIR 1965 SC 193: (1966) 1 SCR 168.

When Strangers may not sue – the general rule

A person not a party to a contract can sue on it; Venkata Chinnaya Rau Garu v. Venkataramaya Garu, 1881 ILR 4 Mad 137.

Creating legal relations

If there being no agreement, there was no breach of contract committed by the respondent and also that since there was no breach of contract, the petitioner cannot retain or forfeit the earnest money deposited by the respondent by way of penalty; State of Tripura v. Bhowmik & Co., AIR 2004 Gau 21.

Chapter I – Of the Communication, Acceptance and Revocation of Proposals

3. Communication, acceptance and revocation of proposals.

The communication of proposals, the acceptance of proposals, and the revocation of proposals and acceptance, respectively, are deemed to be made by any act or omission of the party proposing, accepting or revoking, by which he intends to communicated such proposal, acceptance or revocation, or which has the effect of communicating it.

Communication of acceptance

An offer is accepted when the acceptance is communicated. The communication must be made to the offeror and a communication of acceptance made to a third person creates no contract; Felthouse v. Bindely, (1862) 6 LT 157.

Exposure of goods: offer or not

The Exposure of goods by a shopkeeper does not amount to an offer to sell. On picking the goods, it is an offer by the customer to buy, and sale is not effected until the buyer’s offer price is accepted by the shopkeeper; Pharmaceutical Society of Great Britain v. Boots Cash Chemists (Southern) Ltd., (1952) 2 QB 795.

Offer to the whole world

Though an offer may be made to the whole world, a contract can arise only by acceptance of the offer. Hence knowledge of the terms of the offer is essential for acceptance. Thus where a person sent his servant in search of his missing boy and subsequently offered a reward to any one who would find the boy, the servant, on finding the boy, could not claim the reward, as his search for the boy could not be regarded as a consideration for the promise of reward; Lalman Shukul v. Gauri Dat, (1913) 11 AQLJ 489.

Unaccepted offer creates no right or obligation

A mere making of an offer does not form part of the cause of action for damages for breach of contract which has resulted from the acceptance of the offer. Ordinarily it is the acceptance of the offer and intimation of that acceptance which results in a contract; Bhagwan Das Goverdhan Das Kedia v. Girdhari Lal & Co., AIR 1966 SC 543.

4. Communication when complete

The communication of a proposal is complete when it comes to the knowledge of the person to whom it is made.

The communication of an acceptance is complete,—

as against the proposer, when it is put in a course of transmission to him so as to be out of the power of the acceptor;

as against the acceptor, when it comes to the knowledge of the proposer.

The communication of a revocation is complete,—

as against the person who makes it, when it is put into a course of transmission to the person to whom it is made, so as to be out of the power of the person who makes it; as against the person to whom it is made, when it comes to his knowledge.

Illustrations

(a) A proposes, by letter, to sell a house to B at a certain price.

The communication of the proposal is complete when B receives the letter.

(b) B accepts A’s proposal by a letter sent by post.

The communication of the acceptance is complete,

as against A when the letter is posted;

as against B, when the letter is received by A.

(c) A revokes his proposal by telegram.

The revocation is complete as against A when the telegram is despatched.

It is complete as against B when B receives it.

B revokes his acceptance by telegram. B’s revocation is complete as against B when the telegram is despatched, and as against A when it reaches him.

Communication of proposal and acceptance

The advertisement of the Corporation for tenders was an ‘invitation to make an offer’. The tenders when submitted to the Corporation were ‘offers’ or ‘proposals’ in terms of section 4 of the Act and the ‘communication’ of ‘proposal’ or ‘offers’ was complete when received by the Corporation. In terms of section 4 of the Act, the ‘acceptance’ was not complete as it was never made, and never put into transmission. The revocation within the meaning of section 4 was complete as it was received and within the knowledge of the Corporation. The offers on tenders were revoked before it was accepted. The contract never saw the light of the day; Shyam Biri Works Pvt. Ltd. v. U.P. Forest Corporation, AIR 1990 All 205.

Where an offer is made by a method of instantaneous communication like telex, the contract is only complete when the acceptance is received by the offerer, and the contract is made at the place where the acceptance is received; Entores Ltd. v. Miles Far East Corporation, (1955) 2 All ER 493: (1955) 2 QB 327: (1955) 3 WLR 48.

Contract by correspondence: Antecedents and subsequent negotiations

The communication of acceptance of the highest bid is necessary for completed contract; Haridwar Singh v. Begum Sumbrui, AIR 1972 SC 1942.

Dispensing with notice of acceptance

A notification of acceptance is required for the benefit of the person who makes the offer, the person who makes the offer may dispense with notice to himself if he thinks it desirable to do so: there can be no doubt that where a person in an offer made by him to another person expressly or impliedly, intimates a particular mode of acceptance as sufficient to make the bargain binding, it is only necessary for the other person to whom such offer is made to follow the indicated mode of acceptance; and if the person making the offer expressly or impliedly intimates in his offer that it will be sufficient to act on the proposal without communicating acceptance of it to himself, performance of the condition is a sufficient acceptance without notification; Carlill v. Carbolic Smoke Ball Co., (1893) 1 QBD 256.

5. Revocation of Proposals and acceptance

A proposal may be revoked at any time before the communication of its acceptance is complete as against the proposer, but not afterwards.

An acceptance may be revoked at any time before the communication of the acceptance is complete as against the acceptor, but no afterwards.

Illustrations

A proposes, by a letter sent by post, to sell his house to B.

B accepts the proposal by a letter sent by post.

A may revoke his proposal at any time before or at the moment when B posts his letter of acceptance, but not afterwards.

B may revoke his acceptance at any time before or at the moment when the letter communicating it reaches A, but not afterwards.

Revocation

Where an offer gives the offerer an option to accept within a fixed period, it may be withdrawn even before the expiry of that period unless there is some consideration for keeping it open; Airfred Schonlank v. Muthurayna Chetty, (1892) 2 Mad LJ 57.

6. Revocation how made

A proposal is revoked -

(1) by the communication of notice of revocation by the proposer to the other party;

(2) by the lapse of the time prescribed in such proposal for its acceptance, or, if no time is so prescribed, by the lapse of a reasonable time, without communication of the acceptance;

(3) by the failure of the acceptor to fulfil a condition precedent to acceptance; or

(4) by the death or insanity of the proposer, if the fact of the death or insanity comes to the knowledge of theacceptor before acceptance.

7. Acceptance must be absolute

In order to convert a proposal into a promise the acceptance must -

(1) be absolute and unqualified.

(2) be expressed in some usual and reasonable manner, unless the proposal prescribes the manner in which it is to be accepted. If the proposal prescribes a manner in which it is to be accepted; and the acceptance is not made in such manner, the proposer may, within a reasonable time after the acceptance is communicated to him, insist that his proposal shall be accepted in the prescribed manner, and not otherwise; but; if he fails to do so, he accepts the acceptance.

Acceptance must be unqualified and without condition

The cardinal principle in the light of section 7 of the Act is that the offer and acceptance of an offer must be absolute without giving any room of doubt. It is well settled that the offer and acceptance must be based or founded on three components—Certainty, commitment and communication. If any one of three components is lacking either in the offer or in the acceptance there cannot be a valid contract; Kilburn Engineering Ltd. v. Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Ltd., AIR 2000 Bom 405.

When the acceptor puts in a new condition while accepting, the contract already signed by the proposer is not complete until the proposer accepted the condition; Haridwar Singh v. Begum Sumbrui, AIR 1972 SC 1942.

An acceptance with a variation is no acceptance; it is simply a counter proposal which must be accepted by the original promisor before a contract is made; Haji Mohd. Haji Jiva v. E. Spinner, (1900) 24 Bom 510.

No second acceptance

The rule of law is that a mere offer to sell property, which can be withdrawn at any time, and which is made dependant on the acceptance of the person to whom it is made, is a mere nudum pactum. The person to whom, the offer has been made, cannot, by acceptance make a binding contract after he knows that the person who has made the offer has sold the property to someone else; Dickinson v. Dodds, 1876 Ch. D. 463.

8. Acceptance by performing conditions, or receiving consideration

Performance of the conditions of proposal, for the acceptance of any consideration for a reciprocal promise which may be offered with a proposal, is an acceptance of the proposal.

Performance by act: Interference of acceptance

The defendant company advertised that they would pay pound 1,000 to any person who used their carbolic smoke ball for a certain time any yet contracted influenza. The plaintiff purchased the medicine, used it for the stated time but contracted the disease. It was held that the contract was accepted by being acted upon, that the defendant had not stipulated for any communication of acceptance and therefore the plaintiff was entitled to recover the amount; Carlill v. Carbolic Smoke Ball Co., (1893) 1 QBD 256.

9. Promise, express and implied

In so far as the proposal or acceptance of any promise is made in words, the promise is said to be express. In so far as such proposal or acceptance is made otherwise than in words, the promise is said to be implied.

Implied terms

A contract can be implied and it is very clear from section 9 of the Contract Act, but it is a fundamental principle of law that the court should not make a contract for the parties. A contract implied in fact requires meeting of minds. The court should refuse to read an implied term into a contract which is silent on the point or did not clearly indicate the nature of the term. However, when the stipulations are clear and in contemplation of the parties or which necessarily arise out of the contract between the parties, they will be implied; State of Maharashtra v. Saifuddin Mujjaffarali Saifi, AIR 1994 Bom 48.

Chapter II – Of contracts, violable, contracts and void agreements

10. What agreements are contracts

All agreements are contracts if they are made by the free consent of parties competent to contract, for a lawful consideration and with a lawful object, and are not hereby expressly declared to be void.

Nothing herein contained shall affect any law in force in 1India, and not hereby expressly repealed, by which any contract is required to be made in writing 2or in the presence of witnesses, or any law relating to the registration of documents.

Breach of statutory provision

Railway invited tenders for the supply of jaggery to the railway grain shops. The respondent submitted his tender for the supply of 14,000 imperial maunds of cane jaggery during the month of February and March and the tender was accepted by the letter. So far, the offer of a supply of a definite quantity of jaggery during a specified period at a certain rate and the acceptance of the offer would constitute an agreement, but would fall short of amounting to a legal contract inasmuch as the date of delivery of the jaggery was not specified. Once the order is placed for such supply on such dates, that order amounts to a binding contract making it incumbent on the respondent to supply jaggery in accordance with the terms of the order and also making it incumbent on the Dy. General Manager to accept the jaggery delivered in pursuance of that order; Union of India v. Maddala Thathaiah, (1964) 3 SCR 774.

What agreements are Contract

If entering into a contract containing prescribed terms and conditions is a must under the statute then that contract becomes a statutory contract. If contract incorporates certain terms and conditions in it, which are statutory then the said contract to that extent is statutory; Thermal Power Ltd. v. State of Madhya Pradesh, AIR 2000 SC 1005.

In order to constitute a contract, both the parties must consent to the agreement; Steel Authority of India Ltd. v. Salem Stainless Steel Suppliers, AIR 1994 SC 1415.

A person who by reason of infancy is incompetent to contract cannot make a contract within the meaning of the Act. The question whether a contract is void or voidable presupposes the existence of a contract within the meaning of the Act, and cannot arise in the case of an infant; Mohoribibi v. Dharmodas Ghose, (1903) 30 IA 114.

What agreements are not Contract

Agreement subject to ratification by others who are not parties to it is not a conclusive contract; M.V. Shankar Bhat v. Claude Pinto (Deceased) by LRs, (2003) 4 SCC 86.

——————————-

1. Subs. by Act 3 of 1951, sec. 3 and Sch., for “Part A States and Part C States”. Earlier the words “Part A States and Part C States” were substituted by the A.O. 1950, for the words “the Provinces”.

2. See e.g., sec. 25, the Copyright Act, 1957 (14 of 1957), section 19, the Carriers Act, 1865 (3 of 1865) sections 6 and 7; the Companies Act, 1956 (1 of 1956) sections 12, 30, 46 and 109.

11. Who are competent to contract

Every person is competent to contract who is of the age of majority according to the law to which he is subject, and who is sound mind and is not disqualified from contracting by any law to which he is subject.

Minor’s contract of service

A contract of marriage, entered into by a father for the benefit of his minor child is not void for want of consideration, unlike a contract of service by a minor which is a contract of service entered into by a father on behalf of the minor which is not enforceable as it is void for want of consideration; Raj Rani v. Prem Adib, AIR 1949 Bom 215.

Minor’s contract void

Where a mortgage was made by a minor and the money lender who had advanced money to the minor on the security of the mortgage sued the minor on the strength of the contract. It is held, having regard to sections 2, 10 and 11 of the Contract Act, that the Act makes it essential that the contracting parties should be competent to contract and that a minor’s contract is void; Mohoribibee v. Dharmodas Ghose, (1903) ILR 30 Cal 539 (PC).

———————————

1. See the Indian Majority Act, 1875 (9 of 1875).

12. What is a sound mind for the purposes of contracting

A person is said to be of sound mind for the propose of making a contract, if, at the time when he makes it, he is capable of understanding it and of forming a rational judgement as to its effect upon his interest.A person who is usually of unsound mind, but occasionally of sound mind, may make a contract when he is of sound mind. A person who is usually of sound mind, but occasionally of unsound mind, may not make a contract when he is of unsound mind.

Illustrations

(a)   A patient in a lunatic asylum, who is, at intervals, of sound mind, may contract during those intervals.

(b)   A sane man, who is delirious from fever, or who is so drunk that he cannot understand the terms of a contract, or form a rational judgment as to its effect on his interests, cannot contract whilst such delirium or drunkenness lasts.

13. “Consent” defined -

Two or more person are said to consent when they agree upon the same thing in the same sense.

14. “Free consent” defined -

Consent is said to be free when it is not caused by -

(1) coercion, as defined in section 15, or

(2) undue influence, as defined in section 16, or

(3) fraud, as defined in section 17, or

(4) misrepresentation, as defined in section 18, or

(5) mistake, subject to the provisions of section 20,21, and 22.

Consent is said to be so caused when it would not have been given but for the existence of such coercion, undue influence, fraud, misrepresentation, or mistake.

15. “Coercion” defined

“Coercion” is the committing, or threating to commit, any act forbidden by the Indian Penal Code (45 of 1860) or the unlawful detaining, or threatening to detain, any property, to the prejudice of any person whatever, with the intention of causing any person to enter into an agreement.

Illustrations

A, on board an English ship on the high seas, causes B to enter into an agreement by an act amounting to criminal intimidation under the Indian Penal Code (45 of 1860).

A afterwards sues B for breach of contract at Calcutta.

A has employed coercion, although his act is not an offence by the law of England, and although section 506 of the Indian Penal Code (45 of 1860) was not in force at the time when or place where the act was done.

An act forbidden by the Penal Code

The threat of suicide amounts to coercion within section 15; Chikam Amiraju v. Chickam Seshamma, (1912) 16 IC 344.

16. “Undue influence” defined

1[16.‘Undue influence’ defined.—(1) A contract is said to be induced by “under influence” where the relations subsisting between the parties are such that one of the parties is in a position to dominate the will of the other and uses that position to obtain an unfair advantage over the other.

(2) In particular and without prejudice to the generally of the foregoing principle, a person is deemed to be in a position to dominate the will of another -

(a) where he hold a real or apparent authority over the other, or where he stands in a fiduciary relation to the other; or

(b) where he makes a contract with a person whose mental capacity is temporarily or permanently affected by reason of age, illness, or mental or bodily distress.

(3) Where a person who is in a position to dominate the will of another, enters into a contract with him, and the transaction appears, on the face of it or on the evidence adduced, to be unconscionable, the burden of proving that such contract was not induced by undue influence shall be upon the person in a position to dominate the will of the other.

Nothing in the sub-section shall affect the provisions of section 111 of the Indian Evidence Act, 1872 (1 of 1872)

Illustrations

(a) A having advanced money to his son, B, during his minority, upon B’s coming of age obtains, by misuse of parental influence, a bond from B for a greater amount than the sum due in respect of the advance. A employs undue influence.

(b) A, a man enfeebled by disease or age, is induced, by B’s influence over him as his medical attendant, to agree to pay B an unreasonable sum for his professional services, B employes undue influence.

(c) A, being in debt to B, the money-lender of his village, contracts a fresh loan on terms which appear to be unconscionable. It lies on B to prove that the contract was not induced by undue influence.

(d) A applies to a banker for a loan at a time when there is stringency in the money market. The banker declines to make the loan except at an unusually high rate of interest. A accepts the loan on these terms. This is a transaction in the ordinary course of business, and the contract is not induced by undue influence.]

Unconsiderable transaction

The circumstance that a grandfather made a gift of a portion of his properties to his only grandson a few years before his death is not on the face of it an unconscionable transaction; Subhas Chandra Das Mushib v. Ganga Prasad Das Mushib, AIR 1967 SC 878.

Undue influence

Merely because the parties were nearly related to each other no presumption of undue influence can arise; Subhas Chandra Das Mushib v. Ganga Prasad Das Mushib, AIR 1967 SC 878.

Undue influence and fraud

(i) Undue influence is said to be a subtle species of fraud whereby mastery is obtained over the mind of the victim, by insidious approaches and seductive artifices; Mahboob Khan v. Hakim Abdul Rahim, AIR 1964 Raj 250.

(ii) Where pardanashin and illiterate woman acting under full confidence of the defendant who projected a false impression of the contents of a documents, put this thumb impression on such documents, their comment is a vitiated one; Kharbuja Kuer v. Jangbahadur Rai, AIR 1963 SC 1203.

What to prove—Burden of proof

If the transaction appears to be unconscionable then the burden of proving that the contract was not induced by undue influence is to lie upon the person who was in a position to dominate the will of the other; Shrimati v. Sudhakar R. Bhatkar, Air 1998 Bom 122.

———————————

1. Subs. by Act 6 of 1899, sec. 2, for section 16.

17. “fraud defined “

“Fraud” means and includes any of the following acts committed by a party to a contract, or with his connivance, or by his agents,1 with intent to deceive another party thereto his agent, or to induce him to enter into the contract;

(1) the suggestion as a fact, of that which is not true, by one who does not believe it to be true;

(2) the active concealment of a fact by one having knowledge or belief of the fact;

(3) a promise made without any intention of performing it;

(4) any other act fitted to deceive;

(5) any such act or omission as the law specially declares to be fraudulent.

Explanation.—Mere silence as to facts likely to affect the willingness of a person to enter into a contract is not fraud, unless the circumstances of the case are such that, regard being had to them, it is the duty of the person keeping silence to speak2, or unless his silence, is, in itself, equivalent to speech.

Illustrations

(a) A sells, by auction, to B, a horse which A knows to be unsound. A says nothing to B about the horse’s unsoundness. This is not fraud in A.

(b) B is A’s daughter and has just come of age. Here the relation between the parties would make it A’s duty to tell B if the horse is unsound.

(c) B says to A—‘‘If you do not deny it, I shall assume that the horse is sound”. A says nothing. Here, A’s silence is equivalent to speech.

(d) A and B, being traders, enter upon a contract. A has private information of a change in prices which would affect B’s willingness to proceed with the contract. A is not bound to inform B.

Cases where there is duty to speak

It is the duty of the assured to put the insurer in possession of all material facts affecting the risk covered; Mithoo Lal Nayak v. L.I.C. of India, AIR 1962 SC 814.

Pleading and proof of fraud

The transaction designed to defeat the plaintiff creditors was fraudulent. Fraud was fully carried into effect in letter and spirit. In as much as the plaintiff himself was the preparator of fraud, he should not be granted any discretionary relief. Once it is found that the parties are in pari delicto the court will not assist the party who enters into illegal transaction and makes that transaction the basis of his claim; Sultan Ahmad v. Rashid Ahmad, AIR 1990 All 47.

——————————-

1. Cf. section 238, infra.

2. See section 143, infra.

18. “Misrepresentation” defined

“Misrepresentation” means and includes -

(1) the positive assertion, in a manner not warranted by the information of the person making it, of that whichis not true, though he believes it to be true;

(2) any breach of duty which, without an intent to deceive, gains an advantage to the person committing it, or anyone claiming under him; by misleading another to his prejudice, or to the prejudice of any one claiming under him;

(3) causing, however innocently, a party to an agreement, to make a mistake as to the substance of the thing which is subject of the agreement.

A statement is said to be warranted by the information of the person making it when he receives the information from a trustworthy source. It should not be a mere hearsay; Mohanlal v. Sri Gungaji Cotton Mills Co., (1900) 4 CWN 369.

19. Voidability of agreements without free consent

When consent to an agreement is caused by coercion, 1fraud or misrepresentation, the agreement is a contract voidable at the option of the party whose consent was so caused. A party to contract, whose consent was caused by fraud or mispresentation, may, if he thinks fit, insist that the contract shall be performed, and that he shall be put on the position in which he would have been if the representations made had been true.

Exception : If such consent was caused by misrepreentation or by silence, fraudulent within the meaning of section 17, the contract, neverthless, is not voidable, if the party whose consent was so caused had the means of discovering the truth with ordinary diligence.

Explanation : A fraud or misrepresentation which did not cause the consent to a contract of the party on whom such fraud was practised, or to whom such misrepresentation was made, does not render a contract voidable.

Illustrations

(a) A, intending to deceive B, falsely represents that five hundred maunds of indigo are made annually at A’s factory, and thereby induces B to buy the factory. The contract is voidable at the option of B.

(b) A, by a misrepresentation, leads B erroneously to believe that five hundred maunds of indigo are made annually at A’s factory. B examines the accounts of the factory, which show that only four hundred maunds of indigo have been made. After this B buys the factory. The contract is not voidable on account of A’s misrepresentation.

(c) A fraudulently informs B that A’s estate is free from incumbrance. B thereupon buys the estate. The estate is subject to a mortgage. B may either avoid the contract, or may insist on its being carried out and mortgage-debt redeemed.

(d) B, having discovered a vein of ore on the estate of A, adopts means to conceal, and does conceal the existence of the ore from A. Through A’s ignorance B is enabled to buy the estate at an under-value. The contract is voidable at the option of A.

(e) A is entitled to succeed to an estate at the death of B; B dies: C, having received intelligence of B’s death, prevents the intelligence reaching A, and thus induces A to sell him his interest in the estate. The sale is voidable at the option of A.

Scope

The defendant represented himself to be a partner of the firm by his conduct and through documents and got a loan of Rs. 60,000 from the plaintiff bank. The plaintiff bank gave loan to all the defendants believing them to be partners of the defendant. It was held that the defendant had represented himself to be a partner and therefore liable with other defendants; Oriental Bank of Commerce v. S.R. Kishore & Co., AIR 1992 Del 174.

——————————-

1. The words “undue influence” rep. by Act 6 of 1899, sec. 3.

19-A. Power to set aside contract induced by undue influence -

When consent to an agreement is caused by undue influence, the agreement is a contract voidable at the option of the party whose consent was so caused.

Any such contract may be set aside either absolutely or, if the party who was entitled to avoid it has received any benefit thereunder, upon such terms and conditions as to the Court may seem just.

Illustrations

(a) A’s son has forged B’s name to a promissory note. B under threat of prosecuting A’s son, obtains a bond from A for the amount of the forged note. If B sues on this bond, the Court may set the bond aside.

(b) A, a money-lender, advances Rs. 100 to B, an agriculturist, and, by undue influence, induces B to execute a bond for Rs. 200 with interest at 6 per cent. per month. The Court may set the bond aside, ordering B to repay the Rs. 100 with such interest as may seem just.]

——————————-

1. Ins. by Act 6 of 1899, sec. 3.

20. Agreement void where both parties are under mistake as to matter of fact

Where both the parties to an agreement are under a mistake as to a matter of fact essential to the agreement the agreement is void.

Explanation.—An erroneous opinion as to the value of the thing which forms the subject-matter of the agreement, is not to be deemed a mistake as to a matter of fact.

Illustrations

(a) A agrees to sell to B a specific cargo of goods supposed to be on its way from England to Bombay. It turns out that, before the day of the bargain the ship conveying the cargo had been cast away and the goods lost. Neither party was aware of these facts. The agreement is void.

(b) A agrees to buy from B a certain horse. It turns out that the horse was dead at the time of the bargain, though neither party was aware of the fact. The agreement is void.

(c) A, being entitled to an estate for the life of B, agrees to sell it to C, B was dead at the time of agreement, but both parties were ignorant of the fact. The agreement is void.

Mistake

There can be a mistake of identity only when a person bearing a particular identity exists within the knowledge of the plaintiff and the plaintiff intends to deal with him only; King’s Nortan Metal Co. v. Edridge, Merrett & Co., (1897) 14 TLR 98 (CA).

21. Effect of mistake as to law

A contract is not voidable because it was caused by a mistake as to any law in force in 1India; but mistake as to a law not in force in India has the same effect as a mistake of fact.

2[***]

Illustration

A and B make a contract grounded on the erroneous belief that a particular debt is barred by the Indian Law of Limitation; the contract is not voidable.

3[***]

—————————–

1. The original words “British India” have successively been amended by the A.O. 1948 and the A.O. 1950 to read as above.

2. Paragraph 2 omitted by the A.O. 1950. Earlier paragraph 2 was inserted by the A.O. 1937.

3. The second Illustration rep. by Act 24 of 1917, sec. 3 and Sch. II

22. Contract caused by mistake of one party as to matter of fact

A contract is not voidable merely because it was caused by one of the parties to it being under a mistake as to a matter of fact.

23. What consideration and objects are lawful, and what not

The consideration or object of an agreement is lawful, unless -It is forbidden by law; oris of such nature that, if permitted it would defeat the provisions of any law or is fraudulent; ofinvolves or implies, injury to the person or property of another; orthe Court regards it as immoral, or opposed to public policy.

In each of these cases, the consideration or object of an agreement is said to be unlawful. Every agreement of which the object or consideration is unlawful is void.

Illustrations

(a) A agrees to sell his house to B for 10,000 rupees. Here, B’s promise to pay the sum of 10,000 rupees is the consideration for A’s promise to sell the house and A’s promise to sell the house is the consideration for B’s promise to pay the 10,000 rupees. These are lawful considerations.

(b) A promises to pay B 1,000 rupees at the end of six months, if C, who owes that sum to B, fails to pay it. B promises to grant time to C accordingly. Here, the promise of each party is the consideration for the promise of the other party, and they are lawful considerations.

(c) A promises, for a certain sum paid to him by B, to make good to B the value of his ship if it is wrecked on a certain voyage. Here, A’s promise is the consideration for B’s payment, and B’s payment is the consideration for A’s promise, and these are lawful considerations.

(d) A promises to maintain B’s child, and B promises to pay A 1,000 rupees yearly for the purpose. Here, the promise of each party is the consideration for the promise of the other party. They are lawful considerations.

(e) A, B and C enter into an agreement for the division among them of gains acquired or to be acquired, by them by fraud. The agreement is void, as its object is unlawful.

(f) A promises to obtain for B an employment in the public service and B promises to pay 1,000 rupees to A. The agreement is void, as the consideration for it is unlawful.

(g) A, being agent for a landed proprietor, agrees for money, without the knowledge of his principal, to obtain for B a lease of land belonging to his principal. The agreement between A and B is void, as it implies a fraud by concealment, by A, on his principal.

(h) A promises B to drop a prosecution which he has instituted against B for robbery, and B promises to restore the value of the things taken. The agreement is void, as its object is unlawful.

(i) A’s estate is sold for arrears of revenue under the provisions of an Act of the Legislature, by which the defaulter is prohibited from purchasing the estate. B, upon an understanding with A, becomes the purchaser, and agrees to convey the estate to A upon receiving from him the price which B has paid. The agreement is void, as it renders the transaction, in effect, a purchase by the defaulter and would so defeat the object of the law.

(j) A, who is B’s mukhtar, promises to exercise his influence, as such, with B in favour of C, and C promises to pay 1,000 rupees to A. The agreement is void, becuase it is immoral.

(k) A agrees to let her daughter to hire to B for concubinage. The agreement is void, because it is immoral, though the letting may not be punishable under the Indian Penal Code (45 of 1860).

Applicability

The notification permitting refund of sales tax was contrary to the statute. The tax paid is not an amount spent by the appellant but realised on sale by it. The constitutional requirements of levy of tax being for the welfare of the society and not for a specific individual the agreement or promise made by the Government was in contravention of public purpose thus violative of public policy and void under section 23 of the Contract Act; Amrit Bansapati Co Ltd. v. State of Punjab, AIR 1992 SC 1076.

Illegal and void agreements

The distinction between illegal and void contracts is very thin but it is there. The law may either forbid an agreement to be made, or it may merely say that if it is made the courts will not enforce it. In the former case, it is illegal in the latter only void; Nutan Kumar v. IInd Additional District Judge, Banda, AIR 1994 All 298.

Object of agreement is valid thereof

The exemption clause containing that the carrier shall be under no liability for any damages to passengers, is valid and it legally excludes all liability for negligence and such clause cannot be held bad under section 23 of Act; Indian Airlines v. Madhuri Chowdhuri, AIR 1965 Cal 252.

Scope

If an agreement is merely collateral to another or constitutes an aid facilitating the carrying out of the object of the other agreement which though void, is not prohibited by law it may be enforced as a collateral agreement. Where a person entering into an illegal contract promises expressly or by implication that the contract is blameless such a promise amount to collateral agreement upon which the other party if in fact innocent of turpitude may sue for damages; Rajat Kumar Rath v. Government of India, AIR 2000 Ori 32.

The appellation ‘void’ in relation to a juristic act, means without legal force, effect or consequence, not binding, invalid, null, worthless, cipher, useless and ineffectual etc.; Nutan Kumar v. IInd Additional District Judge, Banda, AIR 1994 All 298.

An agreement offending a statute or public policy or forbidden by law is not merely void but it is invalid from nativity. It cannot become valid even if the parties thereto agree to it; Nutan Kumar v. IInd Additional District Judge, Banda, AIR 1994 All 298.

While the term ‘object’ unlike the term ‘consideration’ has not been defined in section 2 of the Act, but has been held to mean as ‘purpose’ or ‘design’ of the contract. If the object is opposed to public policy or tends to defeat any provision of law, it becomes unlawful and thereby it is void under section 23 of the Act; Nutan Kumar v. IInd Additional District Judge, Banda, AIR 1994 All 298.

The term ‘law’ in section 23 of the Act must be understood in the sense of the term explained in the Article 13(3) of the Constitution; Nutan Kumar v. IInd Additional District Judge, Banda, AIR 1994 All 298.

——————————

1. See sections 26, 27, 28 and 30, infra.

24. Agreements void, if consideration are objects unlawful in part

If any part of a single consideration for one or more objects, or any one or any part of any one of several consideration of a single object, is unlawful, the agreement is void.

Illustration

A promises to superintend, on behalf of B, a legal manufacturer of indigo, and an illegal traffic in other articles. B promises to pay to A a salary of 10,000 rupees a year. The agreement is void, the object of A’s promise, and the consideration for B’s promise, being in part unlawful.

General Rule

Non-compoundable offences, which are a matter of public concern, cannot be subject matter of private bargains and administration of criminal justice should not be allowed to pass from the hands of judges to private individuals. Where the offence is of public nature, no agreement can be valid that is founded on the consideration of stifling of a prosecution for it. The payment of 470 million US dollars by the Union Carbide Corporation to Union of India was held not to be stifling of prosecution and the payment not unlawful; Union Carbide Corporation v. Union of India, AIR 1992 SC 248.

25. Agreement without consideration, void, unless it is in writing and registered or is a promise to compensate for something done or is a promise to pay a debt barred by limitation law

An agreement made without consideration is void, unless -

(1) it is expressed in writing and registered under the law for the time being in force for the registration of 1documents, and is made on account of natural love and affection between parties standing in a near relation to each other; or unless.

(2) it is a promise to compensate, wholly or in part, a person who has already voluntarily done something for the promisor, or something which the promisor was legally compellable to do; or unless.

(3) it is a promise, made in writing and signed by the person to be charged therewith or by his agent generally or specially authorised in that behalf, to pay wholly or in part debt of which the creditor might have enforced payment but for the law for the limitation of suits. In any of these cases, such an agreement is a contract.

Explanation 1 : Nothing in this section shall affect the validity, as between the donor and donee, of any gift actually made.

Explanation 2 : An agreement to which the consent of the promisor is freely given is not void merely because the consideration is inadequate; but the inadequacy of the consideration may be taken into account by the Court in determining the question whether the consent of the promisor was freely given.

Illustrations

(a) A promises, for no consideration, to give to B Rs. 1,000. This is a void agreement.

(b) A, for natural love and affection, promises to give his son, B, Rs. 1,000. A puts his promise to B into writing and registers it. This is a contract.

(c) A finds B’s purse and gives it to him. B promises to give A Rs. 50. This is a contract.

(d) A supports B’s infant son. B promises to pay A’s expenses in so doing. This is a contract.

(e) A owes B Rs. 1,000, but the debt is barred by the Limitation Act. A signs a written promise to pay B Rs. 500 on account of the debt. This is a contract.

(f) A agrees to sell a horse worth Rs. 1,000 for Rs. 10. A’s consent to the agreement was freely given. The agreement is a contract notwithstanding the inadequacy of the consideration.

(g) A agrees to sell a horse worth Rs. 1,000 for Rs. 10. A denies that his consent to the agreement was freely given.

The inadequacy of the consideration is a fact which the Court should take into account in considering whether or not A’s consent was freely given.

Natural love and affection as a consideration

In order to rely upon clause (1) of section 25, the existence of the factum of natural love and affection between parties standing in a near relation to each other is a condition precedent; Rajlukhy Dabee v. Bhootnath Mookherjee, (1900) 4 CWN 488.

Voluntary services

If the services are rendered voluntarily, without the desire of the promisor or otherwise than at his request and the promisor undertakes to recompense the person who has rendered his services for it. In such cases, the promise does not need a consideration to support it, and the case falls under section 25 of the Act; Sindha Shri Ganpatsingji v. Abraham alias Vazir Mahomed Akuji, (1895) 20 Bom 755.

—————————–

1. Subs. by Act 12 of 1891, sec. 2 and Sch. II, Pt. I, for “assurances”.

26. Agreement in restraint of marriage, void

Every agreement in restraint of the marriage of any person, other than a minor, is void.

Agreement in restraint of marriage

An agreement between two co-widows that if any of them remarried, she should forfeit her right to her share in the deceased husband’s property is not in restraint of marriage; A. Suryanarayan Murthi v. P. Krishna Murthy, AIR 1957 Ori 125.

27. Agreement in restraint of trade, void

Every agreement by which anyone is restrained from exercising a lawful profession, trade or business of any kind, is to that extent void.

Exception 1 : Saving of agreement not to carry on business of which good will is sold – One who sells the goodwill of a business may agree with the buyer to refrain from carrying on a similar business, within specified local limits, so long as the buyer, or any person deriving title to the goodwill from him, carries on a like business therein, provided that such limits appear to the court reasonable, regard being had to the nature of the business.

Agreement in restraint of trade

The words “restrained from exercising a lawful profession, trade or business”, do not mean an absolute restriction, and are intended to apply to a partial restriction, a restriction limited to same particular place; Mahbub Chander v. Raj Coomar, (1874) XIV Bengal Law Reports 76.

——————————

1.Exceptions 2 and 3 rep. by Act 9 of 1932, sec. 73 and Sch. II.

28. Agreements in restrain of legal proceedings, void

1[***]Every agreement, by which any party thereto is restricted absolutely from enforcing his rights under or in respect of any contract, by the usual legal proceedings in the ordinary tribunals, or which limits the time within which he may thus enforce his rights, is void to the extent.

Exception 1 : Saving of contract to refer to arbitration dispute that may arise.This section shall not render illegal contract, by which two or more persons agree that any dispute which may arise between them in respect of any subject or class of subject shall be referred to arbitration, and that only and amount awarded in such arbitration shall be recoverable in respect of the dispute so referred.

2[***]

Exception 2: Saving of contract to refer question that have already arisen – Nor shall this section render illegal any contract in writing, by which two or more persons agree to refer to arbitration any question between them which has already arisen, or affect any provision of any law in force for the time being as to reference to arbitration. 3

Agreement restricting law of limitation

The clause in the agreement that the appellant would not have any right under the bond after the expiry of six months from the date of termination of the contract has been held not to be contrary to section 28 of the Act nor it imposed any restriction to file a suit within six months; Food Corporation of India v. New India Assurance Co. Ltd., AIR 1994 SC 1896.

Jurisdiction of the proper court

It has been held that it is not open to the parties by agreement to confer jurisdiction on any court which it did not otherwise possess under section 20 of Code of Civil Procedure; Patel Roadways v. Prasad Trading Company, AIR 1992 SC 1514.

——————————-

1. Subs. by Act 1 of 1997, sec. 2, for certain words (w.e.f. 8-1-1997).

2. The second clause of Exception 1 rep. by Act 1 of 1877, sec. 2 and Sch.

3. Cf. the Arbitration Act, 1940 (10 of 1940) and the Companies Act, 1956 (1 of 1956), section 389.

29. Agreements void for uncertainty

Agreements, the meaning of which is not certain, or capable of being made certain, are void.

Illustrations

(a) A agrees to sell B “a hundred tons of oil”. There is nothing whatever to show what kind of oil was intended. The agreement is void for uncertainty.

(b) A agrees to sell B one hundred tons of oil of a specified description, known as an article of commerce. There is no uncertainty here to make the agreement void.

(c) A, who is a dealer in coconut-oil only, agrees to sell to B “one hundred tons of oil”. The nature of A’s trade affords an indication of the meaning of the words, and A has entered into a contract for the sale of one hundred tons of coconut-oil.

(d) A agrees to sell B “all the grain in my granary at Ramnagar”. There is no uncertainty here to make the agreement void.

(e) A agrees to sell to B “one thousand maunds of rice at a price to be fixed by C”. As the price is capable of being made certain, there is no uncertainty here to make the agreement void.

(f) A agrees to sell to B “my white horse for rupees five hundred or rupees one thousand”. There is nothing to show which of the two prices was to be given. The agreement is void.

30. Agreements by way of wager, void

Agreements by way of wager are void; and no suit shall be brought for recovering anything alleged to be won on any wager, or entrusted to any person to abide the result of any game or other uncertain event on which may wager is made. Exception on favour of certain prizes for horse-racing: This section shall not be deemed to render unlawful a subscription or contribution, or agreement to subscribe or contribute, made or entered into for or toward any plate, prize or sum of money, of the value or amount of five hundred rupees or upwards, to be rewarded to the winner or winners of any horse-race.

Section 294A of the Indian Penal Code not affected : Nothing in this section shall be deemed to legalize any transaction connected with horse-racing, to which the provisions of section 294A of the(45 of 1860) apply.

Scope

To treat an agreement by way of wager as void is that the law discourages people to enter into games of chance and make earning by trying their luck instead of spending their time, energy and labour for more fruitful and useful work for themselves, their family and the society; Subhash Kumar Manwani v. State of Madhya Pradesh, AIR 2000 MP 109.

Wagering Contract

A chit-fund does not come within the scope of wager; Narayana Ayyangar v. K.V. Ambalam, (1927) ILR 50 Mad 696 (FB).

Chapter III – Of contingent contracts

31. “Contingent contract” defined

A “contingent contract” is a contract to do or not to do something, if some event, collateral to such contract, does or does not happen.

Illustration

A contracts to pay to B Rs.10,000 if B’s house is burnt. This is a contingent contract.

32. Enforcement of Contracts contingent on an event happening

Contingent contracts to do or not to do anything in an uncertain future event happens, cannot be enforced by law unless and until that event has happened. If the event becomes impossible, such contracts become void.

Illustrations

(a) A makes a contract with B to buy B’s horse if A survives C. This contract cannot be enforced by law unless and until C dies in A’s lifetime.

(b) A makes a contract with B to sell a horse to B at a specified price, if C, to whom the horse has been offered, refuses to buy him. The contract cannot be enforced by law unless and until C refuses to buy the horse.

(c) A contracts to pay B a sum of money when B marries C. C dies without being married to B. The contract becomes void.

Applicability

The essential idea upon which doctrine of frustration is based is that of impossibility of performance of contract; Satyabrata Ghose v. Mugneeram Bangur, AIR 1954 SC 44.

33. Enforcement of contract contingent on an event not happening

Contingent contracts to do or not to do anything if an uncertain future event does not happen, can be enforced when the happening of that event becomes impossible, and not before.

Illustration

A agrees to pay B a sum of money if a certain ship does not return. The ship is sunk. The contract can be enforced when the ship sinks.

34. When event on which contract is contingent to be deemed impossible, if it is the future conduct of a living person

If the future event on which a contract is contingent is the way in which a person will act at an unspecified time, the event shall be considered to become impossible when such person does anything which renders it impossible that the should so act within any definite time, or otherwise than under further contingencies.

Illustration

A agrees to pay B a sum of money if B marries C, C marries D. The marriage of B to C must now be considered impossible, although it is possible that D may die and that C may afterwards marry B.

35. When contracts become void, which are contingent on happening of specified event within fixed time

Contingent contracts to do or not to do anything, if a specified uncertain event happens within a fixed time, become void, if, at the expiration of the time fixed, such event has not happened, or if, before the time fixed, such event becomes impossible.

When contracts may be enforced, which are contingent on specified event not happening within fixed time : Contingent contract tutu or not to do anything, if a specified uncertain event does not happen within a fixed time, may be enforced by law when the time fixed has expired and such event has not happened, or before the time fixed has expired, if it become certain that such event will not happen.

Illustrations

(a) A promises to pay B a sum of money if a certain ship returns within a year. The contract may be enforced if the ship returns within the year; and becomes void if the ship is burnt within the year.

(b) A promises to pay B a sum of money if a certain ship does not return within a year. The contract may be enforced if the ship does not return within the year, or is burnt within the year.

36. Agreements contingent on impossible event void

Contingent agreements to do or not to do anything, if an impossible event happens, are void, whether the impossibility of the event is known or not to the parties to agreement at the time when it is made.

Illustrations

(a) A agrees to pay B 1,000 rupees if two straight lines should enclose a space. The agreement is void.

(b) A agrees to pay B 1,000 rupees if B will marry A’s daughter C. C was dead at the time of the agreement. The agreement is void.

Chapter IV – Of the performance of contracts which must be performed

37. Obligations of parties to contract

The parties to a contract must either perform, or offer to perform, their respective promises, unless such performance in dispensed with or excused under the provision of this Act, or of any other law.

Promises bind the representative of the promisor in case of the death of such promisors before performance, unless a contrary intention appears from the contract.

Illustrations

(a) A promises to deliver goods to B on a certain day on payment of Rs.1,000. A dies before that day. A’s representatives are bound to deliver the goods to B, and B is bound to pay the Rs. 1,000 to A’s representatives.

(b) A promises to paint a picture for B by a certain day, at a certain price. A dies before the day. The contract cannot be enforced either by A’s representatives or by B

Assignment of Contract

A person cannot be subject to the obligation of a contract to which he is not a party and the logical consequence is that a stranger cannot acquire rights under a contract; Harnam Singh v. Purbi Devi, AIR 2000 HP 108.

Scope

If the agreement makes express provision for enhancement of rate of interest, held, bank need not put borrower on notice before charging higher rate on the basis of the agreement; Syndicate Bank v. R. Veeranna, (2003) 2 SCC 15.

It is well settled principle of law that an arbitration clause is assignable, if the main contract is assignable. An arbitration agreement will find not only the actual parties to it, but also an assignee of the contract containing it; R. K. Associates v. V. Channappa, AIR 1993 Kant 248.

38. Effect of refusal to accept offer of performance

Where a promisor has made an offer of performance to the promisee, and the offer has not been accepted, the promisor is not responsible for non-performance, nor does he thereby lose his rights under the contract.

Every such offer must fulfil the following conditions -

(1) it must be unconditional;

(2) it must be made at a proper time and place, and under such circumstances that the person to whom it is made may have a reasonable opportunity of ascertaining that the person by whom it is been made is able and willing there and then to do the whole of what he is bound by his promise to do;

(3) if the offer is an offer to deliver anything to the promisee, the promisee must have a reasonable opportunity of seeing that the thing offered is the thing which the promisor is bound by his promise to deliver. An offer to one of several joint promisees has the same legal consequences as an offer to all of them.

Illustration

A contracts to deliver to B at his warehouse, on the 1st March, 1873, 100 bales of cotton of a particular quality. In order to make an offer of performance with the effect stated in this section. A must bring the cotton to B’s warehouse, on the appointed day, under such circumstances that B may have a reasonable opportunity of satisfying himself that the thing offered is cotton of the quality contracted for, and that there are 100 bales.

Tender must be strict

Where the instructions have been issued to Bidders asking them to state against each work item unit rate in Indian Currency and in U.S. Dollar or Japanese Yen. Then the quoating of the unit rate 50 per cent. in Indian Rupee and 50 per cent. in U.S. Dollar will not be treated as clerical or Mechinical error and cannot be allowed to be corrected; West Bengal Electricity Board v. Patel Engg. Co. Ltd., AIR 2001 SC 683.

39. Effect of refusal of party to perform promise wholly

When a party to a contract has refused to perform, or disabled himself from performing, his promise in its entirety, the promisee may put an end to the contract,unless he has signified, by words or conduct, his acquiescence in its continuance

Illustrations

(a) A, a singer, enters into a contract with B, the manager of a theatre, to sing at his theatre two nights in every week during next two months, and B engages to pay her 100 rupees for each night’s performance. On the sixth night A wilfully absents herself from the theatre. B is at liberty to put an end to the contract.

(b) A, a singer, enters into a contract with B, the manager of a theatre, to sing at his theatre two nights in every week during next two months, and B engages to pay her at the rate of 100 rupees for each night. On the sixth night A wilfully absents herself. With the assent of B, A sings on the seventh night. B has signified his acquiescence in the continuance of the contract, and cannot now put an end to it, but is entitled to compensation for the damage sustained by him through A’s failure to sing on the sixth night.

40. Person by whom promises is to be performed

If it appears from the nature of the case that it was the intention of the parties to any contract that any promise contain in it should be performed by the promisor himself, such promise must be performed by the promisor.

In other cases, the promisor or his representative may employ a competent person to perform it.

Illustrations

(a) A promises to pay B a sum of money. A may perform this promise, either by personally paying the money to B or by causing it to be paid to B by another; and, if A dies before the time appointed for payment, his representatives must perform the promise, or employ some proper person to do so.

(b) A promises to paint a picture for B. A must perform this promise personally.

41. Effect of accepting performance from this person

When a promisee accepts performance of the promise from a third person, he cannot afterwards enforce it against the promisor.

42. Devolution of joint liabilities

When two or more person have made a joint promise, then, unless a contrary intention appears by the contract, all such persons, during their joint lives, and, after the death of any of them, his representative jointly with the survivor or survivors, and, after the death of the last survivor the representatives of all jointly, must fulfil the promise.

43. Any one of joint promisors may be compelled to perform

When two or more persons make a joint promise, the promise may, in the absence of express agreements to the contrary, compel any 1one or more of such joint promisors to perform the whole promise.

Each promisor may compel contribution : Each of two or more joint promisors may compel every other joint promisor to contribute equally with himself to the performance of the promise, unless a contrary intention appears from the contract.

Sharing of loss by default in contribution : If any one of two or more joint promisors make default in such contribution, the remaining joint promisors mus bear the loss arising from such default in equal shares.

Explanation : Nothing in this section shall prevent a surety from recovering, from his principal, payments made by the surety on behalf of the principal, or entitle the principal to recover anything from the surety on account of payments made by the principal.

Illustrations

(a) A, B and C jointly promise to pay D 3,000 rupees. D may compel either A or B or C to pay him 3,000 rupees.

(b) A, B and C jointly promise to pay D the sum of 3,000 rupees. C is compelled to pay the whole. A is insolvent, but his assets are sufficient to pay one-half of his debts. C is entitled to receive 500 rupees from A’s estate, and 1,250 rupees from B.

(c) A, B and C are under a joint promise to pay D 3,000 rupees. C is unable to pay anything, and A is compelled to pay the whole. A is entitled to receive 1,500 rupees from B.

(d) A, B and C are under a joint promise to pay D 3,000 rupees. A and B being only sureties for C. C fails to pay. A and B are compelled to pay the whole sum. They are entitled to recover it from C.

———————————–

1. Subs. by Act 12 of 1891, sec. 2 and Sch. II Pt. I, for “one”.

44. Effect of release of one joint promisor

Where two or more persons have made a joint promise, a release of one of such joint promisors by the promisee does not discharge the other joint promisor,neither does it free the joint promisor so released from responsibility to the other joint promisor or joint promisors.1

—————————

1. See section 138. infra.

45. Devolution of joint rights

When a person has made a promise to two or more persons jointly, then unless contrary intention appears from the contract, the right to claim performance rests, as between him and them, with them during their joint lives, and, after the death of any one of them, with the representative of such deceased person jointly with the survivor or survivors, and, after the death of the last survivor, with the representatives of all jointly.1

Illustration

A, in consideration of 5,000 rupees lent to him by B and C, promises B and C jointly to repay them that sum with interest on a day specified. B dies. The right to claim performance rests with B’s representative jointly with C during C’s life, and after the death of C, with the representatives of B and C jointly.

———————————–

1. For an exception to section 45 in case of Government securities, see the Public Debt Act, 1944 (18 of 1944), section 8.

46. Time for performance of promise, where no application is to be made and no time is specified

Where, by the contract, a promisor is to perform his promise without application by the promisee, and no time for performance is specified, the engagement must be performed within a reasonable time.

Explanation : The question “what is a reasonable time” is, in each particular case, a question of fact.

47. Time and place for performance of promise, where time is specified and no application to be made

When a promise is to be performed on a certain day, and the promisor has undertaken to perform it without the application by the promisee, the promisor may perform it at any time during the usual hours of business on such day and at the place at which the promise ought to be performed.

Illustration

A promises to deliver goods at B’s warehouse on the first January. On the day A brings the goods to B’s warehouse, but after the usual hour closing it, and they are not received. A has not performed his promise.

48. Application for performance on certain day to be at proper time and place

When a promise is to be performed on a certain day, and the promisor has not undertaken to perform it without application by the promisee, it is the duty of the promisee to apply for the performance at a proper place within the usual hours of business.

Explanation : The question “what is proper time and place” is, in each particular case, a question of fact.

49. Place for the performance of promise, where no application to be made and no place fixed for performance

When a promise is to be performed without application by the promisee, and not place is fixed for the performance of it, it is the duty of the promisor to apply to the promisee to appoint a reasonable place for the performance of the promise, and to perform it at such a place.

Illustration

A undertakes to deliver a thousand maunds of jute to B on a fixed day. A must apply to B to appoint a reasonable place for the purpose of receiving it, and must deliver it to him at such place.

50. Performance in manner or at time prescribed or sanctioned by promise

The performance of any promise may be made in any manner, or at any time which the promisee prescribes or sanctions

Illustrations

(a) B owes A 2,000 rupees. A desires B to pay the amount to A’s account with C, a banker. B, who also banks with C, orders the amount to be transferred from his account to A’s credit, and this is done by C. Afterwards, and before A knows of the transfer, C fails. There has been a good payment by B.

(b) A and B are mutually indebted. A and B settle an account by setting off one item against another, and B pays A the balance found to be due from him upon such settlement. This amounts to a payment by A and B, respectively, of the sums which they owed to each other.

(c) A owes B 2,000 rupees. B accepts some of A’s goods in reduction of the debt. The delivery of the goods operates as a part payment.

(d) A desires B, who owes him Rs.100, to send him a note for Rs.100 by post. The debt is discharged as soon as B puts into the post a letter containing the note duly addressed to A.

Manner and time of performance

If any agreement states that a particular act relating to the furtherance of a contract is to be done in a particular manner, it should be done in that manner and it is not open to the parties to chalk out his own manner of performing his part of contract; Bishamber Nath Agarwal v. Kishan Chand, AIR 1990 All 70.

51. Promisor not bound to perform, unless reciprocal promisee ready and willing to perform

When a contract consists of reciprocal promises to be simultaneously performed, no promisor need perform his promise unless the promisee is ready and willing to perform his reciprocal promise.

Illustrations

(a) A and B contract that A shall deliver goods to B to be paid for by B on delivery. A need not deliver the goods, unless B is ready and willing to pay for the goods on delivery.

B need not pay for the goods, unless A is ready and willing to deliver them on payment.

(b) A and B contract that A shall deliver goods to B at a price to be paid by instalments, the first instalment to be paid on delivery.

A need not deliver, unless B is ready and willing to pay the first instalment on delivery.

B need not pay the first instalment, unless A is ready and willing to deliver the goods on payment of the first instalment.

52. Order of performance of reciprocal promises

Where the order in which reciprocal promises are to be performed is expressly fixed by the contract, they shall be performed in that order, and where the orders is not expressly fixed by the contract, they shall be performed in that order which the nature of transaction requires.

Illustrations

(a) A and B contract that A shall build a house for B at a fixed price. A’s promise to build the house must be performed before B’s promise to pay for it.

(b) A and B contract that A shall make over his stock-in-trade to B at a fixed price, and B promise to give security for the payment of the money. A’s promise need not be performed until the security is given, for the nature of transaction requires that A should have security before he delivers up his stock.

53. Liability of party preventing event on which contract is to take effect

When a contract contains reciprocal promises and one party to the contract prevents the other from performing his promise, the contract becomes voidable at the option of the party so prevented; and he is entitled to compensation 1from the other party for any loss which he may sustain in consequence of the non-performance of the contract.

Illustration

A and B contract that B shall execute certain work for A for a thousand rupees. B is ready and willing to execute the work accordingly, but A prevents him from doing so. The contract is voidable at the option of B; and, if he elects to rescind it, he is entitled to recover from A compensation for any loss which he has incurred by its non-performance.

——————————–

 1.See section 73, infra.

54. Effect of default as to the promise which should be performed, in contract consisting or reciprocal promises

When a contract consists of reciprocal promises, such that one of them cannot be performed, or that its performance cannot be claimed till the other has been performed, and the promisor of the promise last mentioned fails to perform it, such promisor cannot claim the performance of the reciprocal promise, and must make compensation to the other party to the contract for any loss which such other party may sustain by the non-performance of the contract.

Illustrations

(a) A hires B’s ship to take in and convey, from Calcutta to the Mauritius, a cargo to be provided by A, B receiving a certain freight for its conveyance. A does not provide any cargo for the ship. A cannot claim the performance of B’s promise, and must take compensation to B for the loss which B sustains by the non-performance of the contract.

(b) A contracts with B to execute certain builder’s work for a fixed price, B supplying the scaffolding and timber necessary for the work. B refuses to furnish any scaffolding or timber, and the work cannot be executed. A need not execute the work, and B is bound to make compensation to A for any loss caused to him by the non-performance of the contract.

(c) A contracts with B to deliver to him, at a specified price, certain merchandise on board a ship which cannot arrive for a month, and B engages to pay for the merchandise within a week from the date of the contract. B does not pay within the week. A’s promise to deliver need not be performed, and B must make compensation.

(d) A promises B to sell him one hundred bales of merchandise, to be delivered next day, and B promises A to pay for them within a month. A does not deliver according to his promise. B’s promise to pay need not be performed, and A must make compensation.

55. Effect of failure to perform a fixed time, in contract in which time is essential

When a party to a contract promises to do a certain thing at or before a specified time, or certain thins at or before a specified time and fails to do such thing at or before a specified time, and fails to do such thing at or before a specified time, the contract or so much of it as has not been performed, becomes voidable at the option of the promisee, if the intention of the parties was that time should be of essence of the contract.

Effect of such failure when time is not essential: If it was not the intention of the parties that time should be of the essence of the contract, the contract does not become voidable by the failure to do such thing at or before the specified time; but the promisee is entitled to compensation from the promisor for any loss occasioned to him by such failure.

Effect of acceptance of performance at time other than agreed upon: If, in case of a contract voidable on account of the promisor’s failure to perform his promise at the time agreed, the promisee accepts performance of such promise at any time other than agree, the promisee cannot claim compensation of any loss occasioned by the non-performance of the promise at the time agreed, unless, at the time of acceptance, he give notice to the promisor of his intention to do so.1

Time – whether essence of Contract

The parties, may make time of the essence either expressly in terms which unmistakably provide that they intended to do so. Alternately, making of time as the essence of a contract may be inferred from the nature of the contract, the property or the surrounding circumstances; Swarnam Ramchandran v. Aravacode Chakungal Jayapalan, AIR 2000 Bom 410.

When the contract itself provides for extension of time, the same cannot be termed to be the essence of the contract and default, however, in such a case it does not make the contract voidable; Arosan Enterprises Ltd. v. Union of India, AIR 1999 SC 3804.

The deferred clause indicated that time was not the essence of the contract. But in the present case the defendants had kept quite for an unreasonably long time so the defendants cannot rely on this clause but the plaintiffs can seek the relief of possession prayed for; Y.A. Kader v. Muthulakshmi Ammal, AIR 1992 Mad 208.

In a contract for the sale of land or immovable property, it would normally be presumed that time was not of the essence of the contract; Gomathinayagam Pillai v. Palaniswami Nadar, AIR 1967 SC 868: (1967) 1 SCR 227.

——————————

1. Cf. sections 62 and 63, infra.

56. Agreement to do impossible act

An agreement to do an act impossible in itself is void. Contract to do act afterwards becoming impossible or unlawful: A contract to do an act which, after the contract is made, becomes impossible or, by reason of some event which the promisor could not prevent, unlawful, becomes void when the act becomes impossible or unlawful.1

Compensation for loss through non-performance of act known to be impossible or unlawful: Where one person has promised to be something which he knew or, with reasonable diligence, might have known, and which the promisee did not know to be impossible or unlawful, such promisor must make compensation to such promise for any loss which such promisee sustains through the non-performance of the promise.

Illustrations

(a) A agrees with B to discover treasure by magic. The agreement is void.

(b) A and B contract to marry each other. Before the time fixed for the marriage, A goes mad. The contract becomes void.

(c) A contracts to marry B, being already married to C, and being forbidden by the law to which he is subject to practise polygamy. A must make compensation to B for the loss caused to her by the non-performance of his promise.

(d) A contracts to take in cargo for B at a foreign port. A’s Government afterwards declares war against the country in which the port is situated. The contract becomes void when war is declared.

(e) A contracts to act at a theatre for six months in consideration of a sum paid in advance by B. On several occasions A is too ill to act. The contract to act on those occasions becomes void.

Contracting party must not be in default

In contracts in which the performance depends on the continued existence of a given person or thing, a condition is implied that the impossibility arising from the perishing of the person or thing shall excuse performance; Taylor v. Caldwel, 122 ER 30.

It is not permissible for the courts to travel outside the provisions of the section and import the principles of English law de hors the statutory provisions; Satyabrata Ghose v. Mugneeram Bangur & Co., AIR 1954 SC 44.

Impossibility may be in law or in fact

The doctrine of frustration is really an aspect or part of the law of discharge of contract by reason of supervening impossibility or illegality of the act agreed to be done and hence comes within the purview of section 56; Satyabrata Ghose v. Mugneeram Bangur, AIR 1954 SC 44.

Scope and applicability

Section 56 lays a positive rule relating to frustration and does not leave the matter of frustration to the court to be determined. There can be no agreement on altered circumstances and it has also been held that if a consideration of the terms of the contract in the light of the circumstances when it was made shows that the parties never agreed to be bound in a fundamentally different situation which unexpectedly arises the contract ceases to bind at that point, not because the court in its discretion considers it just but on true construction it does not apply in that situation; Shyam Biri Works Pvt. Ltd. v. U.P. Forest Corporation, AIR 1990 SC 205.

——————————

1. See section 65, infra.

57. Reciprocal promise to do things legal, and also other things illegal

Where persons reciprocally promise, firstly to do certain things which are legal, and, secondly under specified circumstances, to do certain other things which are illegal, the first set of promise is a contract, but the second is a void agreement.

Illustration

A and B agree that A shall sell B a house for 10,000 rupees, but that, if B uses it as a gambling house, he shall pay A 50,000 rupees for it.

The first set of reciprocal promises, namely, to sell the house and to pay 10,000 rupees for it, is a contract.

The second set is for an unlawful object, namely, that B may use the house as a gambling house, and is a void agreement.

58. Alternative promise, one branch being illegal

In the case of an alternative promise, one branch of which is legal and other other illegal, the legal branch alone can be enforced.

Illustration

A and B agree that A shall pay B 1,000 rupees, for which B shall afterwards deliver to A either rice or smuggled opium.

This is a valid contract to deliver rice, and a void agreement as to the opium.

59. Application of payment where debt to be discharged is indicated

Where a debtor, owing several distinct debts to one person, makes a payment to him, either with express intimation, or under circumstances implying, that the payment is to be applied to the discharge of some particular debt, the payment if accepted, must be applied accordingly.

Illustrations

(a) A owes B, among other debts, 1,000 rupees upon a promissory note, which falls due on the first June. He owes B no other debt of that amount. On the first June, A pays to B 1,000 rupees. The payment is to be applied to the discharge of the promissory note.

(b) A owes to B, among other debts, the sum of 567 rupees. B writes to A and demands payment of this sum. A sends to B 567 rupees. This payment is to be applied to the discharge of the debt of which B had demanded payment.

Scope of applicability

To several distinct debts payable by a person and not to the various heads of one debt. The principal and interest due on a single debt or decree passed on such debt carrying subsequent interest cannot be held to several distinct debts. Accepting such an argument would amount to doing violence to the language employed in the section and the purpose sought to be achieved by it. Besides it would also be contradictory in terms; Industrial Credit and Development Syndicate now called I.C.D.S. Ltd. v. Smithaben H. Patel, AIR 1999 SC 1036.

The principle applies to several distinct debts and not to a single debt payable by instalments; Munno Bibi v. Commissioner of Income-tax, AIR 1952 All 514.

60. Application of payment where debt to be discharged is not indicated

Where the debtor has ommitted to intimate, and there are no other circumstances indicating to which debt the payment is to be applied, the creditor may apply it at his discretion to any lawful debt actually due and payable to him from the debtor, whether its recovery is or is not barred by the law in force for the time being as to the limitations of suits.

61. Application of payment where neither party appropriates

Where neither party makes any appropriation, the payment shall be applied in discharge of the debts in order of time, whether they are or are not barred by the law in force for the time being as to the limitation of suits. If the debts are of equal standing, the payment shall be applied in discharge of each proportionally.

62. Effect of novation, rescission, and alteration of contract-

If the parties to a contract agree to substitute a new contract for it, or to rescind or alter it, the original contract need not be performed.

Illustrations

 (a) A owes money to B under a contract. It is agreed between A, B and C, that B shall thenceforth accept C as his debtor, instead of A. The old debt of A to B is at an end, and a new debt from C to B has been contracted.

(b) A owes B 10,000 rupees. A enters into an agreement with B, and gives B a mortgage of his (A’s), estate for 5,000 rupees in place of the debt of 10,000 rupees. This is a new contract and extinguishes the old.

(c) A owes B 1,000 rupees under a contract, B owes C 1,000 rupees, B orders A to credit C with 1,000 rupees in his books, but C does not assent to the agreement. B still owes C 1,000 rupees, and no new contract has been entered into.

Alteration of Contracts

Person entering into agreement under section 8(1)(a) of Requisition and Acquisition of Immovable Property Act cannot later claim a legal right to obtain a court order directing reopening of the agreement, just because a subsequent award granted higher compensation for land similar to his own; Dayal Singh v. Union of India, (2003) 2 SCC 593.

If the parties to a Contract agree

The plaintiff Bank had agreed that the defendants could pay the amount of Rs.10,00,000 which would be convenient to both the parties subsequent to the filing of the suit. The parties have entered into a second agreement to supersede the liability and the entitlement formulated through the transaction and that under the circumstances the said subsequent agreement squarely comes within the ambit of section 62 of the Act; Central Bank of India v. V. G. Naidu & Sons (Leather) Pvt. Ltd., AIR 1992 Mad 139.

Material alteration

A material alteration is one which varies the rights, liabilities or legal position of the parties as ascertained by the deed from its original state, or otherwise varies the effect of the instrument as originally expressed or reduces to certainty some provisions which were originally unascertained and as such void, or which may otherwise prejudice the party bound by the deed as originally executed. The effect of making such an alteration without the consent of the party bound is exactly the same as that of cancelling the deed. The last line in the schedule of property regarding delivery of possession was held to be inserted not on the date of execution of agreement but subequent to it and have material alteration; Janab M. H. M. Yakoob v. M. Krishnan, AIR 1992 Mad 80.

Where an existing mortgage was replaced by a new agreement of mortgage, the new agreement being not enforceable for want of registration, the parties were still bound by the original mortgage; Shanker Lal Damodhar v. Ambalal Ajaipal, AIR 1946 Nag 260.

63. Promise may dispense with or remit performance of promise

Every promise may dispense with or remit, wholly or in part, the performance of the promise made to him, or may extend the time for such performance, 1or may accept instead of it any satisfaction which he thinks fit.

Illustrations

(a) A promises to paint a picture for B. B afterwards forbids him to do so. A is no longer bound to perform the promise.

(b) A owes B 5,000 rupees. A pays to B, and B accepts, in satisfaction of the whole debt, 2,000 rupees paid at the time and place at which the 5,000 rupees were payable. The whole debt is discharged.

(c) A owes B 5,000 rupees. C pays to B 1,000 rupees, and B accepts them, in satisfaction of his claim on A. This payment is a discharge of the whole claim.2

(d) A owes B, under a contract, a sum of money, the amount of which has not been ascertained. A, without ascertaining the amount, gives to B, and B, in satisfaction thereof, accepts, the sum of 2,000 rupees. This is a discharge of the whole debt, whatever may be its amount.

(e) A owes B 2,000 rupees, and is also indebted to another creditors. A makes an arrangement with his creditors, including B, to pay them a 3[composition] of eight annas in the rupee upon their respective demands. Payment to B of 1,000 rupees is a discharge of B’s demand.

Becomes void – discovered to be void

Section 65 starts from the basis of there being an agreement or contract between competent parties and has no application to a case in which there never was, and never could have been any contract, e.g. where one of the parties was a minor; Mohori Bibee v. Dharmodas Ghose, (1903) ILR 30 Cal 539 (PC).

Necessity for consideration

The plaintiff bank accepted the sum of Rs. 10,00,000 from the defendants towards the full discharge of the suit claim according to second agreement. It was held that having received the said compromise amount, it is not open for the plaintiff to claim the overdue interest to the extent of Rs. 69,571.20 for which there has been no agreement and that under the circumstances the claim, if any made by the plaintiff has been directly hit by section 63 of Contract Act; Central Bank of India v. V. G. Naidu & Sons (Leather) Pvt. Ltd., AIR 1992 Mad 139.

Waiver

A waiver is nothing unless it amounts to a release. It signifies nothing more than an intention not to insist upon the right; Jagad Bandhu Chatterjee v. Nilima Rani, (1969) 3 SCC 455: (1970) 2 SCR 925: (1971) 1 SCJ 38.

——————————

1. But See section 135, infra.

2. See section 41, supra.

3. Subs. by Act 12 of 1891, sec. 2 and Sch. II, Pt. I, for “compensation”.

64. Consequence of rescission of voidable contract

When a person at whose option a contract is voidable rescinds it, the other party thereto need to perform any promise therein contained in which he is the promisor. The party rescinding a voidable contract shall, if he have received any benefit thereunder from another party to such contract restore such benefit, so far as may be, to the person from whom it was received.1

—————————

1.See section 75, infra.

65. Obligation of person who has received advantage under void agreement, or contract that becomes void -

When an agreement is discovered to be void, or when a contract becomes void, any person who has received any advantage under such agreement or contract is bound to restore, it, or to make compensation for it, to the person from whom he received it.

Illustrations

 (a) A pays B 1,000 rupees, in consideration of B’s promising to marry C, A’s daughter. C is dead at the time of the promise. The agreement is void, but B must repay A the 1,000 rupees.

 (b) A contracts with B to deliver to him 250 maunds of rice before the first of May. A delivers 130 maunds only before that day, and none after. B retains the 130 maunds after the first of May. He is bound to pay A for them.

 (c) A, a singer, contracts with B, the manager of a theatre, to sing at his theatre for two nights in every week during the next two months, and B engages to pay her a hundred rupees for each night’s performance. On the sixth night, A wilfully absents herself from the theatre, and B, in consequence, rescinds the contract. B must pay A for the five nights on which she had sung.

 (d) A contracts to sing for B at a concert for 1,000 rupees, which are paid in advance. A is too ill to sing. A is not bound to make compensation to B for the loss of the profits which B would have made if A had been able to sing, but must refund to B the 1,000 rupees paid in advance.

Frustrated Contracts

Where under a contract of Insurance the insured gave a cheque to the insurer for payment of first premium amount, but the cheque was dishonoured by the drawee-bank due to inadequacy of the funds in the account of the drawer, the insurer is not liable in such a situation to honour the claim of the insured. Even if the insurer has disbursed the amount covered by the policy to the insured before the cheque was returned dishonoured insurer is entitled to get the money back; National Insurance Company Ltd. v. Seema Malhotra, AIR 2001 SC 1197.

66. Mode of communicating or revoking rescission of voidable contract

The rescission of a voidable contract may be communicated or revoked in the same manner, and subject to some rules, as apply to the communication or revocation of the proposal. proposal.1

—————————–

1.see sections 3 and 5, supra.

67. Effect of neglect or promise to afford promisor reasonable facilities for performance

If any promisee neglects or refuses to afford the promisee reasonable facilities for the performance of his promise, the promisor is excused by such neglect or refusal as to non-performance caused thereby.

Illustration

A contracts with B to repair B’s house.

B neglects or refuses to point out to A the places in which his house requires repair.

A is excused for the non-performance of the contract, if it is caused by such neglect or refusal.

Chapter V – Of certain relations resembling those created by contract

68. Claim for necessaries supplied to person incapable of contracting, or on his account

If a person, incapable of entering into a contract, or anyone whom he is legally bound to support, is supplied by another person with necessaries suited to his condition in life, the person who has furnished such supplies is entitled to be reimbursed from the property of such incapable person.

Illustrations

(a) A supplies B, a lunatic, with necessaries suitable to his condition in life. A is entitled to be reimbursed from B’s property.

 (b) A suplies the wife and children of B, a lunatic, with necessaries suitable to their condition in life. A is entitled to be reimbursed from B’s property.

—————————–

1.   The property of a Government ward in Madhya Pradesh is not liable under this section; see the C.P. Court of Wards Act, 1899 (C.P. Act 24 of 1899), section 31(I).

69. Reimbursement of person paying money due by another, in payment of which he is interested

A person who is interested in the payment of money which another is bound by law to pay, and who therefore pays it, is entitled to be reimbursed by the other.

Illustration

B holds land in Bengal, on a lease granted by A, the zamindar. The revenue payable by A to the Government being in arrear, his land is advertised for sale by the Government. Under the revenue law, the consequence of such sale will be the annulment of B’s lease. B to prevent the sale and the consequent annulment of his own lease, pays the Government the sum due from A. A is bound to make good to B the amount so paid.

Contribution and reimbursement

Where a person is jointly liable with other to pay, a payment by him of the other’s share would not give him a right of recovery under this section; Jagpatiraju v. Sadnusannama, AIR 1916 Mad 980.

70. Obligation of person enjoying benefit of non-gratuitous act

Where a person lawfully does anything for another person, or delivers anything to him, not intending to do so gratuitously, and such another person enjoys the benefit thereof, the letter is bound to make compensation to the former in respect of, or to restore, the thing so done or delivered.

71. Responsibility of finder of goods

A person who finds goods belonging to another, and takes them into his custody, is subject to the same responsibility as a bailee.1

———————–

1.See sections 151 and 152,infra.

72. Liability of person to whom money is paid, or thing delivered, by mistake or under coercion

A person to whom money has been paid, or anything delivered, by mistake or under coercion, must repay or return it.

Illustrations

 (a) A and B jointly owe 100 rupees to C, A alone pays the amount to C, and B, not knowing this fact, pays 100 rupees over again to C. C is bound to repay the amount to B.

 (b) A railway company refuses to deliver up certain goods to the consignee except upon the payment of an illegal charge for carriage. The consignee pays the sum charged in order to obtain the goods. He is entitled to recover so much of the charge as was illegal and excessive.

Ingredients of unjust enrichment

Under this Section the principle of unjust enrichment cannot be extended to give a right to the State to recover or realise vend fee after the concerned statute for realisation or recovery of vend fee has been struck down; M/s. Somaiya Organics (India) Ltd. V. State of Uttar Pradesh, AIR 2001 SC 1725.

Chapter VI – Of the consequences of breach of contract

73. Compensation of loss or damage caused by breach of contract

When a contract has been broken, the party who suffers by such breach is entitled to receive, form the party who has broken the contract, compensation for any loss or damage caused to him thereby, which naturally arose in the usual course of things from such breach, or which the parties knew, when they made the contract, to be likely to result from the breach of it.

Such compensation is not to be given for any remote and indirect loss of damage sustained by reason of the breach.

Compensation for failure to discharge obligation resembling those created by contract : When an obligation resembling those created by contract has been incurred and has not been discharged, any person injured by the failure to discharge it is entitled to receive the same compensation from the party in default, as if such person had contracted to discharge it and had broken his contract.

Explanation : In estimating the loss or damage arising from a breach of contract, the means which existed of remedying the inconvenience caused by non-performance of the contract must be taken into account.

Illustrations

(a) A contracts to sell and deliver 50 maunds of saltpetre to B, at a certain price to be paid on delivery. A breaks his promise. B is entitled to receive from A, by way of compensation, the sum, if any, by which the contract price falls short of the price for which B might have obtained 50 maunds of saltpetre of like quality at the time when the saltpetre ought to have been delivered.

 (b) A hires B’s ship to go to Bombay, and there takes on board, on the first of January, a cargo, which A is to provide, and to bring it to Calcutta, the freight to be paid when earned. B’s ship does not go to Bombay, but A has opportunities of procuring suitable conveyance for the cargo upon terms as advantageous as those on which he had chartered the ship. A avails himself of those opportunities, but is put to trouble and expense in doing so. A is entitled to receive compensation from B in respect of such trouble and expense.

 (c) A contracts to buy of B, at a stated price, 50 maunds of rice, no time being fixed for delivery. A afterwards informs B that he will not accept the rice if tendered to him. B is entitled to receive from A, by way of compensation, the amount, if any, by which the contract price exceeds that which B can obtain for the rice at the time when A informs B that he will not accept it.

 (d) A contracts to buy B’s ship for 60,000 rupees, but breaks his promise. A must pay to B, by way of compensation, the excess, if any, of the contract price over the price which B can obtain for the ship at the time of the breach of promise.

 (e) A, the owner of a boat, contracts with B to take a cargo of jute to Mirzapur, for sale at that place, starting on a specified day. The boat, owing to some avoidable cause, does not start at the time appointed, whereby the arrival of the cargo at Mirzapur is delayed beyond the time when it would have arrived if the boat had sailed according to the contract. After that date, and before the arrival of the cargo, the price of jute falls. The measure of the compensation payable to B by A is the difference between the price which B could have obtained for the cargo at Mirzapur at the time when it would have arrived if forwarded in due course, and its market price at the time when it actually arrived.

 (f) A contracts to repair B’s house in a certain manner, and receives payment in advance. A repairs the house, but not according to contract. B is entitled to recover from A the cost of making the repairs conform to the contract.

 (g) A contracts to let his ship to B for a year, from the first of January, for a certain price. Freights rise, and, on the first of January, the hire obtainable for the ship is higher than the contract price. A breaks his promise. He must pay to B, by way of compensation, a sum equal to the difference between the contract price and the price for which B could hire a similar ship for a year on and from the first of January.

 (h) A contracts to supply B with a certain quantity of iron at a fixed price, being a higher price than that for which A could procure and deliver the iron. B wrongfully refuses to receive the iron. B must pay to A, by way of compensation, the difference between the contract price of the iron and the sum for which A could have obtained and delivered it.

 (i) A delivers to B, a common carrier, a machine, to be conveyed, without delay, to A’s mill, informing B that his mill is stopped for want of machine. B unreasonably delays the delivery of the machine, and A, in consequence, loses a profitable contract with the Government. A is entitled to receive from B, by way of compensation, the average amount of profit which would have been made by the working of the mill during the time that delivery of it was delayed, but not the loss sustained through the loss of the Government contract.

 (j) A, having contracted with B to supply B with 1,000 tons of iron at 100 rupees a ton, to be delivered at a stated time, contracts with C for the purchase of 1,000 tons of iron at 80 rupees a ton, telling C that he does so for the purpose of performing his contract with B. C fails to perform his contract with A, who cannot procure other iron, and B, in consequence, rescinds the contract. C must pay to A 20,000 rupees, being the profit which A would have made by the performance of his contract with B.

 (k) A contracts with B to make and deliver to B, by a fixed day, for a specified price, a certain piece of machinery. A does not deliver the piece of machinery, at the time specified, and, in consequence of this, B is obliged to procure another at a higher price than that which he was to have paid to A, and is prevented from performing a contract which B had made with a third person at the time of his contract with A (but which had not been communicated to A), and is compelled to make compensation for breach of that contract. A must pay to B, by way of compensation, the difference between the contract price of the price of machinery and the sum paid by B for another, but not the sum paid by B to the third person by way of compensation.

 (l) A, a builder, contracts to erect and finish a house by the first of January, in order that B may give possession of it at that time to C, to whom B has contracted to let it. A is informed of the contract between B and C. A builds the house so badly that, before the first of January, it falls down and has to be re-built by B, who, in consequence, loses the rent which he was to have received from C, and is obliged to make compensations to C for the breach of his contract. A must make compensation to B for the cost of rebuilding of the house, for the rent lost, and for the compensation made to C.

(m) A sells certain merchandise to B, warranting it to be of a particular quality, and B, in reliance upon this warranty, sells it to C with a similar warranty. The goods prove to be not according to the warranty, and B becomes liable to pay C a sum of money by way of compensation. B is entitled to be reimbursed this sum by A.

 (n) A contracts to pay a sum of money to B on a day specified. A does not pay the money on that day. B, in consequence of not receiving the money on that day, is unable to pay his debts, and is totally ruined. A is not liable to make good to B anything except the principal sum he contracted to pay, together with interest upto the day of payment.

 (o) A contracts to deliver 50 maunds of saltpetre to B on the first of January, at a certain price, B, afterwards, before the first of January, contracts to sell the saltpetre to C at a price higher than the market price of the first of January. A breaks his promise. In estimating the compensation payable by A to B, the market price of the first of January, and not the profit which would have arisen to B from the sale to C, is to be taken into account.

 (p) A contracts to sell and deliver 500 bales of cotton to B on a fixed day. A knows nothing of B’s mode of conducting his business. A breaks his promise, and B, having no cotton, is obliged to close his mill. A is not responsible to B for the loss caused to B by closing of the mill.

 (q) A contracts to sell and deliver to B, on the first of January, certain cloth which B intends to manufacture into caps of a particular kind, for which there is no demand, except at that season. The cloth is not delivered till after the appointed time, and too late to be used that year in making caps. B is entitled to receive from A, by way of compensation, the difference between the contract price of the cloth and its market price at the time of delivery, but not the profits which he expected to obtain by making caps, nor the expenses which he has been put to in making preparation for the manufacture.

 (r) A, a ship owner, contracts with B to convey him from Calcutta to Sydney in A’s ship, sailing on the first of January, and B pays to A, by way of deposit, one-half of his passage-money. The ship does not sail on the first of January, and B, after being, in consequence, detained in Calcutta for some time, and thereby put to some expense, proceeds to Sydney in another vessel, and, in consequence, arriving too late in Sydney, loses a sum of money. A is liable to repay to B his deposit, with interest, and the expense to which he is put by his detention in Calcutta, and the excess, if any, of the passage-money paid for the second ship over that agreed upon for the first, but not the sum of money which B lost by arriving in Sydney too late.

Award of damages

When a contract is broken, the party who suffers by such breach is entitled to receive compensation for any loss or damage caused to him from the party who has broken the contract; K. Narayana Kurup v. Sankaranarayanan, AIR 2000 Ker 296.

Breach of Contract of carriage

A corporation had placed the order on telephone. The entire transaction was oral and no attempt was made to produce any witness of the alleged buyer to support the contention that the market value of the goods was at the rate of Rs. 3,000 per metric ton. The material on record does not show that the price of goods has risen to Rs. 3,000. Therefore the damages as a result of non-delivery of the alleged goods, have not been proved by the plaintiff and he is not entitled to any damages; Thakral and Sons v. Indian Petro Chemicals Corporation Ltd., AIR 1994 Del 226.

Damages for breach of contract

When there is a breach of contract, party to the contract cannot determine as to who has committed breach. Damages could be recovered from the person who has committed breach only after the same is determined. The conditions of contract would be considered as liquidated damages and could be recovered and no power has been conferred on the other contracting party to determine the damages; P.V. Paily v. State of Kerala, AIR 2000 Ker 268.

The party in breach must make compensation in respect of the direct consequences flowing from the breach and not in respect of loss or damage indirectly or remotely caused; Pannalal Jankidas v. Mohanlal, AIR 1951 SC 145: (1950) SCR 979.

Damages for breach of contract of service

A contract of service entered into by father on behalf of minor is void being without consideration; Raj Rani v. Prem Adib, AIR 1949 Bom 215.

Damages when become due

A seller who commits breach will be liable to compensate according to the prices at the place of sale and not at destination; Murlidhar Chiranji Lal v. Harish Chandra Dwarkadas, AIR 1962 SC 366: (1962) 1 SCR 653.

Limitation

The principle of awarding damages for a reasonable period or reasonable period of notice comes into play only when the contract of employment is not for a fixed period; S.S. Shetty v. Bharat Nidhi Ltd., AIR 1958 SC 12: (1958) SCR 442.

Measure of damages – Breach of contract for sale of goods

Damages are to be awarded as compensation for any loss or damage arising naturally in the usual course of things from the breach of contract; Karsandas H. Thacker v. Saran Engg. Co. Ltd., AIR 1965 SC 1981.

Natural and probable result of breach: Special damage

In cases of breach of contract the damages should be such as may fairly and reasonably be considered as arising naturally or the damages may be such as may reasonably be supposed to have been in contemplation of both parties at the time they made the contract as the probable result of the breach of it. The damages, however cannot include compensation for any remote and indirect loss or damages sustained by reason of the breach; Hadley v. Bexendale, 9 Ex 742.

Taking advantage of benefit resulting from breach of contract

Where a vendee is in default and the vendor subsequently sells at a price higher than the market price on the date of delivery, the fact that by reason of the loss of the contract which the vendee had failed to perform, the vendor obtained the benefit of another contract which was of value to him did not entitle the vendee to the benefit of the later contract; Jamal v. Moola Dawood Sons & Co., (1916) AC 175.

74. Compensation of breach of contract where penalty stipulated for

1[When a contract has been broken, if a sum is named in the contract as the amount to be paid in case of such breach, or if the contract contains any other stipulation by way of penalty, the party complaining of the breach is entitled, whether or not actual damage or loss is proved to have been caused thereby, to receive from the party who has broken the contract reasonable compensation not exceeding the amount so named or, as the case may be, the penalty stipulated for.

Explanation.— A stipulation for increased interest from the date of default may be a stipulation by way of penalty.]

Exception.— When any person enters into any bail-bond, recognizance or other instrument of the same nature or, under the provisions of any law, or under the orders of the 2[Central Government] or of any 3[State Government], gives any bond for the performance of any public duty or act in which the public are interested, he shall be liable, upon breach of the condition of any such instrument, to pay the whole sum mentioned therein.

Explanation.— A person who enters into a contract with Government does not necessarily thereby undertake any public duty, or promise to do an act in which the public are interested.

Illustrations

 (a) A contracts with B to pay B Rs. 1,000 if he fails to pay B Rs. 500 on a given day. A fails to pay B Rs. 500 on that day. B is entitled to recover from A such compensation, not exceeding Rs. 1,000, as the Court considers reasonable.

 (b) A contracts with B that, if A practises as a surgeon within Calcutta , he will pay B Rs. 5,000. A practises as a surgeon in Calcutta . B is entitled to such compensation; not exceeding Rs. 5,000 as the court considers reasonable.

 (c) A gives a recognizance binding him in a penalty of Rs. 500 to appear in Court on a certain day. He forfeits his recognizance. He is liable to pay the whole penalty.

4[(d) A gives B a bond for the repayment of Rs. 1,000 with interest at 12 per cent. at the end of six months, with a stipulation that, in case of default, interest shall be payable at the rate of 75 per cent. from the date of default. This is a stipulation by way of penalty, and B is only entitled to recover from A such compensation as the Court considers reasonable.

 (e) A, who owes money to B, a money-lender, undertakes to repay him by delivering to him 10 maunds of grain on a certain date, and stipulates that, in the event of his not delivering the stipulated amount by the stipulated date, he shall be liable to deliver 20 maunds. This is a stipulation by way of penalty, and B is only entitled to reasonable consideration in case of breach.

 (f) A undertakes to repay B a loan of Rs. 1,000 by five equal monthly instalments, with a stipulation that, in default, of payment of any instalment, the whole shall become due. This stipulation is not by way of penalty, and the contract may be enforced according to its terms.

 (g) A borrows Rs. 100 from B and gives him a bond for Rs. 200 payable by five yearly instalments of Rs. 40, with a stipulation that, in default of payment of any instalment, the whole shall become due. This is a stipulation by way of penalty.]

Courts power to grant damages fined

Where the right to recover liquidated damages under section 74 is found to exit no question of ascertaining damages really arises; Chunilal Mehta & Sons Ltd. v. Century Spinning & Mfg. Co. Ltd., AIR 1962 SC 1314.

Penalty and liquidated damages

A clause in a contract can be described as penal if the party who has to pay a certain amount of money fails to pay the amount within the time stipulated. In such a situation the other party will be at liberty to recover the entire sum with interest and costs. Such a clause would be penal in character. But if half payment is made within the time stipulated, the other party waves his right to the balance amount; Prithvichand Ramchand Sablok v. S.Y. Shinde, AIR 1993 SC 1934.

———

1. Subs. by Act 6 of 1899, sec. 4, for the first paragraph.

2. Subs. by the A.O. 1937, for “Government of India ”.

3. Subs. by the A.O. 1950, for “Provincial Government”.

4. Ins. by Act 6 of 1899, sec. 4(2).

75. Party rightfully rescinding contract, entitled to compensation

A person who rightfully rescinds a contract is entitled to consideration for any damage which he has sustained through the no fulfillment of the contract.

Illustration

A, a singer, contracts with B, the manager of a theatre, to sing at his theatre for two nights in every week during the next two months, and B engages to pay her 100 rupees for each night’s performance. On the sixth night, A wilfully absents herself from the theatre, and B, in consequence, rescinds the contracts. B is entitled to claim compensation for the damage which he has sustained through the non-fulfilment of the contract.

Chapter VII – Sale of Goods

Section 76 to 123 -

Repealed

Chapter VIII – Of indemnity and guarantee

124. “Contract of indemnity” defined

A contract by which one party promises to save the other from loss caused to him by the contract of the promisor himself, or by the conduct of any other person, is called a “contract of indemnity”.

Illustration

A contracts to indemnify B against the consequences of any proceedings which C may take against B in respect of a certain sum of 200 rupees. This is a contract of indemnity.

Idemnity and guarantee

Acknowledgement of debt by principal debtor binds the guarantor in all respects as if he had given express consent; United Commercial Bank v. B. M. Mahadev Babu, AIR 1992 Kant 294.

125. Right of indemnity-holder when sued -

The promisee in a contract of indemnity, acting within the scope of his authority, is entitled to recover from the promisor-

 (1) all damages which he may be compelled to pay in any suit in respect of any matter to which the promise to indemnify applies;

 (2) all costs which he may be compelled to pay in any such suit, if in bringing of defending it, he did not contravene the orders of the promisor, and acted as it would have been prudent for him to act in the absence of any contract of indemnity, or if the promisor authorised him to bring or defend the suit;

 (3) all sums which he may have paid under the terms of any compromise of any such suit, if the compromise was not contract to the orders of the promisor, and was one which it would have been prudent for the promise to make in the absence of any contract of indemnity, or if the promisor authorised him to compromise the suit.

126. “Contract of guarantee”, “surety”, “principal debtor” and “creditor” -

A “contract of guarantee” is a contract to perform the promise, or discharge the liability, of a third person in case of his default. The person who gives the guarantee is called the “surety”, the person in respect of whose default the guarantee is given is called the “principal debtor”, and the person to whom the guarantee is given is called the “creditor”. A guarantee may be either oral or written.

Bank guarantee

Once it becomes apparent that there was no chance to fulfil the conditions in the bank guarantee, invocation of the bank guarantee would not be premature or unjustified; Daewoo Motors India Ltd. v. Union of India, (2003) 4 SCC 690.

It is well settled that bank guarantee is an autonomous contract. It is in common parlance that the issuance of guarantee is what a guarantor creates to discharge liability when the principal debtor fails in his duty and guarantee is in the nature of collateral agreement to answer for the debt; Syndicate Bank v. Vijay Kumar, AIR 1992 SC 1066.

127. Consideration for guarantee

Anything done, or any promise made, for the benefit of the principal debtor, may be a sufficient consideration to the surety for giving the guarantee.

Illustrations

 (a) B requests A to sell and deliver to him goods on credit. A agrees to do so, provided C will guarantee the payment of the price of the goods. C promises to guarantee the payment in consideration of A’s promise to deliver the goods. This is a sufficient consideration for C’s promise.

 (b) A sells and delivers goods to B. C afterwards requests A to forbear to sue B for the debt for a year, and promises that, if he does so, C will pay for them in default of payment by B. A agrees to forbear as requested. This is a sufficient consideration for C’s promise.

 (c) A sells and delivers goods to B. C afterwards, without consideration, agrees to pay for them in default of B. The agreement is void.

128. Surety’s liability

The liability of the surety is co-extensive with that of the principal debtor, unless it is otherwise provided by the contract.

Illustration

A guarantees to B the payment of a bill of exchange by C, the acceptor. The bill is dishonoured by C. A is liable, not only for the amount of the bill, but also for any interest and charges which may have become due on it.

General

Contract of guarantee does not provide any contra-note pertaining to the liability of the surety so as to create an exception within the meaning of section 128; Industrial Finance Corporation of India Ltd. v. Cannonore Spinning & Weaving Mills Ltd., (2002) 5 SCC 54.

Limitation

It is a settled law that the creditor would be entitled to adjust from the payment of a sum by a debtor towards the time barred debt from the guarantor’s account. The appellant did not act in violation of any law when he cut the amount from the fixed deposit of the respondent i.e. the surety when the principal debtor failed to pay; Punjab National Bank v. Surendra Prasad Sinha, AIR 1992 SC 1815.

Scope

The clauses of the guarantees executed by the appellant in favour of PICUP clearly show that the liability of the guarantors was to remain unaffected by the failure of PICUP to enforce its mortgage and hypothecation against the assets of the company. There is nothing in the contracts which can in any way be construed as contrary to the joint and several liability created under section 128; Kailash Nath Agarwal v. Pradeshiya Industrial & Investment Corporation of U.P. Ltd., (2003) 4 SCC 305.

The surety has given a continuing guarantee, limited in amount, to secure the floating balance which may from time to time be due from the principal debtor to the creditor, the guarantee is prima facie to be construed as being of part only of the debt. A continuing guarantee may even be for the fixed period. It is well settled that the guarantor cannot be made liable beyond the terms of the agreements; Aditya Naryan Chouresia v. Bank of India, AIR 2000 Pat 222.

Surety may be liable though the principals Contract is void

The Liability of the sureties is co-extensive with that of the principal debtor. Consequently creditor can proceed against the principal debtor or against the sureties, unless it is otherwise provided in the contract. The same should also be the principle with regard to the rights and liabilities between co-sureties as well. A co-surety cannot insist that the creditor should proceed either against the principal debtor or against other sureties before proceeding against him; Kerala State Financial Enterprises Ltd. v. C.J. Thampi, AIR 2000 Ker 36.

129. Continuing guarantee

A guarantee which extends to a series of transaction, is called, a “continuing guarantee”.

Illustrations

(a) A, in consideration that B will employ C in collecting the rents of B’s zamindari, promises B to be responsible, to the amount of 5,000 rupees, for the due collection and payment by C of those rents. This is a continuing guarantee.

 (b) A guarantees payment to B, a tea-dealer, to the amount of £ 100, for any tea he may from time to time supply to C. B supplies C with tea of above the value of £ 100, and C pays B for it. Afterwards, B supplies C with tea of the value of £ 200. C fails to pay. The guarantee given by A was a continuing guarantee, and he is accordingly liable to B to the extent of £ 100.

 (c) A guarantees payment to B of the price of five sacks of flour to be delivered by B to C and to be paid for in a month. B delivers five sacks to C. C pays for them. Afterwards B delivers four sacks to C, which C does not pay for. The guarantee given by A was not a continuing guarantee, and accordingly he is not liable for the price of the four sacks.

130. Revocation of continuing guarantee

A continuing guarantee may at any time be revoked by the surety, as to future transactions, by notice to the creditor.

Illustrations

 (a) A, in consideration of B’s discounting, at, A’s request, bills of exchange for C, guarantees to B, for twelve months, the due payment of all such bills to the extent of 5,000 rupees. B discounts bills for C to the extent of 2,000 rupees. Afterwards, at the end of three months, A revokes the guarantee. This revocation discharges A from all liability to B for any subsequent discount. But A is liable to B for the 2,000 rupees, on default of C.

 (b) A guarantees to B, to the extent of 10,000 rupees, that C shall pay all the bills that B shall draw upon him. B draws upon C, C accepts the bill. A gives notice of revocation. C dishonours the bill at maturity. A is liable upon his guarantee.

131. Revocation of continuing guarantee by surety’ death -

The death of the surety operates, in the absence of any contract to the contrary, as a revocation of ma continuing guarantee, so far as regards future transactions.

132. Liability of two persons, primarily liable, not affected by arrangement between them that one shall be surety on other’s default -

Where two persons contract with third person to undertake a certain liability, and also contract with each other that one of them shall be liable only on the default of the other, the third person not being a party to such contract the liability of each of such two persons to the third person under the first contract is not affected by the existence of the second contract,although such third person may have been aware of its existence.

Illustration

A and B make a joint and several promissory note to C. A makes it, in fact, as surety for B, and C knows this at the time when the note is made. The fact that A, to the knowledge of C, made the note as surety for B, is no answer to a suit by C against A upon the note.

133. Discharge of surety by variance in terms of contract-

Any variance made without the surety’s consent, in the terms of the contract between the principal 1[debtor] and the creditor, discharges the surety as to transactions subsequent to the variance.

Illustrations

 (a) A becomes surety to C for B’s conduct as manager in C’s bank. Afterwards, B and C contract, without A’s consent, that B’s salary shall be raised, and that he shall become liable for one-fourth of the losses on overdrafts. B allows a customer to over-draw, and the bank loses a sum of money.

A is discharged from his suretyship by the variance made without his consent, and is not liable to make good this loss.

 (b) A guarantees C against the misconduct of B in an office to which B is appointed by C, and of which the duties are defined by an Act of the Legislature. By a subsequent Act, the nature of the office is materially altered. Afterwards, B misconducts himself. A is discharged by the change from future liability under his guarantee, though the misconduct of B is in respect of a duty not affected by the later Act.

 (c) C agrees to appoint B as his clerk to sell goods at a yearly salary, upon A’s becoming surety to C for B’s duly accounting for moneys received by him as such clerk. Afterwards, without A’s knowledge or consent, C and B agree that B should be paid by a commission on the goods sold by him and not by a fixed salary. A is not liable for subsequent misconduct of B.

 (d) A gives to C a continuing guarantee to the extent of 3,000 rupees for any oil supplied by C to B on credit. Afterwards B becomes embarrassed, and, without the knowledge of A, B and C contract that C shall continue to supply B with oil for ready money, and that the payments shall be applied to the then, existing debts between B and C. A is not liable on his guarantee for any goods supplied after this new arrangement.

 (e) C contracts to lend B 5,000 rupees on the 1st March. A guarantees repayment. C pays the 5,000 rupees to B on the 1st January, A is discharged from his liability, as the contract has been varied, inasmuch as C might sue B for the money before the first of March.

—————————–

1.Ins. by Act 24 of 1917, sec. 2 and Sch. I.

134. Discharge of surety by release or discharge of principal debtor -

The surety is discharged by any contract between the creditor and the principal debtor, by which the principal debtor is released, or by any act or omission of the creditor, the legal consequence of which is the discharge of the principal debtor.

Illustrations

 (a) A gives a guarantee to C for goods to be supplied by C to B. C supplies goods to B, and afterwards B becomes embarrassed and contracts with his creditors (including C) to assign to them his property in consideration of their releasing him from their demands. Here B is released from his debt by the contract with C, and A is discharged from his suretyship.

 (b) A contracts with B to grow a crop of indigo on A’s land and to deliver it to B at a fixed rate, and C guarantees A’s performance of this contract. B diverts a stream of water which is necessary for irrigation of A’s land, and thereby prevents him from raising the indigo. C is no longer liable on his guarantee.

 (c) A contracts with B for a fixed price to build a house for B within a stipulated time. B supplying the necessary timber. C guarantees A’s performance of the contract. B omits to supply the timber. C is discharged from his suretyship.

135. Discharge of surety when creditor compounds with, gives time to, or agrees not to sue, principal debtor

A contract between the creditor and the principal debtor, by which the creditor make a composition with, or promises to give time, or not to sue, the principal debtor, discharges the surety, unless the surety assents to such contract.

136. Surety not discharged when agreement made with third person to give time to principal debtor

Where a contract to give time to the principal debtor is made by the creditor with a third person, and not with the principal debtor, the surety is not discharged.

Illustration

C, the holder of an overdue bill of exchange drawn by A as surety for B, and accepted by B, contracts with M to give to B. A is not discharged.

137. Creditor’s forbearance to sue does not discharge surety

Mere forbearance on the part of the creditor to sue the principal debtor or to enforce any other remedy against him, dies not, in the absence of any provision in the guarantee to the contrary, discharge the surety.

Illustration

B owes to C a debt guaranteed by A. The debt becomes payable. C does not sue B for a year after the debt has become payable. A is not discharged from his suretyship.

138. Release of one co-surety does not discharge other -

Where there are co-sureties, a release by the creditor of one of them does not discharge the others neither does set free the surety so released from his responsibility to the other sureties.1

———————

1.See section 44,supra.

139. Discharge of surety by creditor’s act or omission impairing surety’s eventual remedy -

If the creditor does any act which is inconsistent with the right of the surety, or omits to do any act which his duty to the surety requires him to do, and the eventual remedy of the surety himself against the principal debtor is thereby impaired, the surety is discharged.

Illustrations

 (a) B contracts to build a ship for C for a given sum, to be paid by instalments as the work reaches certain stages. A becomes surety to C for B’s due performance of the contract. C, without the knowledge of A, prepays to B the last two instalments. A is discharged by this prepayment.

(b) C lends money to B on the security of a joint and several promissory note made in C’s favour by B, and by A as surety for B, together with a bill of sale of B’s furniture, which gives power to C to sell the furniture, and apply the proceeds in discharge of the note. Subsequently, C sells the furniture, but, owing to his misconduct and wilful negligence, only a small price is realized. A is discharged from liability on the note.

 (c) A puts M as apprentice to B, and gives a guarantee to B for M’s fidelity. B promises on his part that he will at least once a month, see M make up the cash. B omits to see this done as promised, and M embezzles. A is not liable to B on his guarantee.

 (a) B contracts to build a ship for C for a given sum, to be paid by instalments as the work reaches certain stages. A becomes surety to C for B’s due performance of the contract. C, without the knowledge of A, prepays to B the last two instalments. A is discharged by this prepayment.

(b) C lends money to B on the security of a joint and several promissory note made in C’s favour by B, and by A as surety for B, together with a bill of sale of B’s furniture, which gives power to C to sell the furniture, and apply the proceeds in discharge of the note. Subsequently, C sells the furniture, but, owing to his misconduct and wilful negligence, only a small price is realized. A is discharged from liability on the note.

 (c) A puts M as apprentice to B, and gives a guarantee to B for M’s fidelity. B promises on his part that he will at least once a month, see M make up the cash. B omits to see this done as promised, and M embezzles. A is not liable to B on his guarantee.

140. Rights of surety on payment or performance -

Where a guaranteed debt has become due, or default of the principal debtor to perform a guaranteed duty has taken place, the surety upon payment or performance of all that he is liable for, is invested with all the rights which the creditor had against the principal debtor.

A guarantor will get invested with all the rights which the creditor had only “upon payment or performance of all that he is liable for”. A guarantor is liable for any payment or performance of any obligation only to the extent the principal debtor has defaulted; C.K. Aboobacker v. K.P. Ayishu, AIR 2000 Ker 29 (NOC).

141. Surety’s right to benefit of creditor’s securities -

A surety is entitled to the benefit of every security which the creditor has against the principal debtor at the time when the contract of suretyship entered into, whether the surety knows of the existence of such security or not; and if the creditor loses, or without the consent of the existence of such security or not; and if the creditor loses, or without the consent of the surety, parts with such security, the surety, the surety is discharged to the extent of the value of the security.

Illustrations

 (a) C, advances to B, his tenant, 2,000 rupees on the guarantee of A. C has also a further security for the 2,000 rupees by a mortgage of B’s furniture. C, cancels the mortgage. B becomes insolvent and C sues A on his guarantee. A is discharged from liability to the amount of the value of the furniture.

 (b) C, a creditor, whose advance to B is secured by a decree, receives also a guarantee for that advance from A. C afterwards takes B’s goods in execution under the decree, and then, without the knowledge of A, withdraws the execution. A is discharged.

 (c) A, as surety for B, makes a bond jointly with B to C, to secure a loan from C to B. Afterwards, C obtains from B a further security for the same debt. Subsequently, C gives up the further security. A is not discharged.

Meaning of security

Creditor cannot be said to have lost or parted with a security, without consent of the surety, unless there has been some voluntary act by him; Industrial Finance Corporation of India Ltd. v. Cannanore Spinning & Weaving Mills Ltd., (2002) 5 SCC 54.

142. Guarantee obtained by misrepresentation, invalid

Any guarantee which has been obtained by means of misrepresentation made by the creditor, or with his knowledge and assent, concerning a material part of the transaction, is invalid.

143. Guarantee obtained by concealment, invalid

Any guarantee which the creditor has obtained by means of keeping silence as to meterial circumstances, is invalid.

Illustrations

 (a) A engages B as clerk to collect money for him. B fails to account for some of his receipts, and A in consequence calls upon him to furnish security for his duly accounting. C gives his guarantee for B’s duly accounting. A does not acquaint C with B’s previous conduct. B afterwards makes default. The guarantee is invalid.

 (b) A guarantees to C payment for iron to be supplied by him to B to the amount of 2,000 tons. B and C have privately agreed that B should pay five rupees per ton beyond the market price, such excess to be applied in liquidation of an old debt. This agreement is concealed from A. A is not liable as a surety.

144. Guarantee on contract that creditor shall not act on it until co-surety joins -

Where a person gives a guarantee upon a contract that the creditor shall not act upon it until another person has jointed in it as co-surety, the guarantee is not valid that other person does not join.

145. Implied promise to indemnify surety -

In every contract of guarantee there is an implied promise by the principal debtor to indemnify the surety, and the surety is entitled to recover from the principal debtor whatever sum he has rightfully paid under the guarantee, but no sums which he has paid wrongfully.

Illustrations

 (a) B is indebted to C, and A is surety for the debt. C demands payment from A, and on his refusal sues him for the amount. A defends the suit, having reasonable grounds for doing so, but he is compelled to pay the amount of debt with costs. He can recover from B the amount paid by him for costs, as well as the principal debt.

 (b) C lends B a sum of money, and A, at the request of B, accepts a bill of exchange drawn by B upon A to secure the amount. C, the holder of the bill, demands payment of it from A, and, on A’s refusal to pay, sues him upon the bill. A, not having reasonable grounds for so doing, defends the suit, and has to pay the amount of the bill and costs. He can recover from B the amount of the bill, but not the sum paid for costs, as there was no real ground for defending the action.

 (c) A guarantees to C, to the extent of 2,000 rupees, payment for rice to be supplied by C to B. C supplies to B rice to a less amount than 2,000 rupees, but obtains from A payment of the sum of 2,000 rupees in respect of the rice supplied. A cannot recover from B more than the price of the rice actually supplied.

Surety’s right

There is an implied promise by the principal debtor to indemnify the surety and on its basis the latter is entitled to recover from the former whatever sum the latter had rightfully paid under the contract of guarantee; C.K. Aboobacker v. K.P. Ayishu, AIR 2000 Ker 29 (NOC).

146. Co-sureties liable to contribute equally -

Where two or more persons are co-sureties for the same debt or duty, either jointly or severally, and whether under the same or different contract, and whether with or without the knowledge of each other the co-sureties, in the absence of any contract to the contrary, are liable, as between themselves, to pay each an equal share of the whole debt, or of that part of it which remains unpaid by the principal debtor.1

Illustrations

 (a) A, B and C are sureties to D for the sum of 3,000 rupees lent to E. E makes default in payment. A, B and C are liable, as between themselves, to pay 1,000 rupees each.

 (b) A, B and C are sureties to D for the sum of 1,000 rupees lent to E, and there is a contract between A, B and C that A is to be responsible to the extent of one-quarter, B to the extent of one-quarter, and C to the extent of one-half. E makes default in payment. As between the sureties, A is liable to pay 250 rupees, B 250 rupees, and C 500 rupees.

————————

1. See section 43, supra.

147. Liability of co-sureties bound in different sums -

Co-sureties who are bound in different sums are liable to pay equally as far as the limits of their respective obligations permit.

Illustrations

(a) A, B and C, as sureties for D, enter into three several bonds, each in a different penalty, namely, A in the penalty of 10,000 rupees, B in that of 20,000 rupees, C in that of 40,000 rupees, conditioned for D’s duly accounting to E. D makes default to the extent of 30,000 rupees. A, B and C are liable to pay 10,000 rupees.

 (b) A, B and C, as sureties for D, enter into three several bonds, each in a different penalty, namely, A in the penalty of 10,000 rupees, B in that of 20,000 rupees, C in that of 40,000 rupees, conditioned for D’s duly accounting to E. D makes default to the extent of 40,000 rupees. A is liable to pay 10,000 rupees, and B and C 15,000 rupees each.

 (c) A, B and C, as sureties for D, enter into three several bonds, each in a different penalty, namely, A in the penalty of 10,000 rupees, B in that of 20,000 rupees, C in that of 40,000 rupees, conditioned for D’s duly accounting to E. D makes default to the extent of 70,000 rupees. A, B and C have to pay the full penalty of his bond.

Chapter IX – Of bailment

148. ‘Bailment’, ‘bailor’ and ‘bailee’ defined.—

A ‘bailment’ is the delivery of goods by one person to another for some purpose, upon a contract that they shall, when the purpose is accomplished, be returned or otherwise disposed of according to the directions of the person delivering them. The person delivering the goods is called the ‘bailor’. The person to whom they are delivered is called the ‘bailee’.

Explanation.—If a person is already in possession of the goods of other contracts to hold them as a bailee, he thereby becomes the bailee, and the owner becomes the bailor of such goods, although they may not have been delivered by way of bailment.

Bailment – general

One of the requirements of bailment is delivery of goods to the bailee. Delivery of possession to the bailee is sine qua non of bailment. In order to constitute a bailment change of possession is necessary; Kavita Trehan v. Balsara Hygiene Products Ltd., AIR 1992 Del 103.

149. Delivery to bailee how made -

The delivery to be bailee may be made by doing anything which has the effect of putting the goods in the possession of the intended bailee or of any person authorised to hold them on his behalf.

150. Bailor’s duty to disclose faults in goods bailed -

The bailor is bound to disclose to the bailee faults in the goods bailed, of which the bailor is aware, and which materially interfere with the use of them, or expose the bailee to extraordinary risk; and if he does not make such disclosure, he is responsible for damage arising to the bailee directly from such faults.

Illustrations

 (a) A lends a horse, which he knows to be vicious, to B. He does not disclose the fact that the horse is vicious. The horse runs away. B is thrown and injured. A is responsible to B for damage sustained.

 (b) A hires a carriage of B. The carriage is unsafe, though B is not aware of it, and A is injured. B is responsible to A for the injury.

151. Care to be taken by bailee -

1151. Care to be taken by bailee.—In all cases of bailment the bailee is bound to take as much care of the goods bailed to him as a man of ordinary prudence would, under similar circumstances, take of his own goods of the same bulk, quantity and value as the goods bailed.2

Care required

In all cases of bailment the bailee is bound to take as much care of the goods bailed to him as a man of ordinary prudence would under similar circumstances; Kavita Trehan v. Balsara Hygiene Products Ltd., AIR 1992 Del 103.

Railway company as bailee

Under section 73 of The Railways Act, the responsibility of railway administration as a carrier and also as a bailee commences from the moment the goods are entrusted to the railway administration for transit to be carried by railway and continues until the goods are unloaded at the destination point. When the responsibility under section 73 of the Railways Act terminates, the responsibility of the railway administration under section 77 of The Railway Act commences; Union of India v. Sattur Nataraja Traders, AIR 1992 Kant 301.

—————————–

1. The responsibility of the Trustees of the Port of Madras constituted under the Madras Port Trust Act, 1905 (Madras Act 2 of 1905), in regard to goods has been declared to be that of a bailee under these sections, without the qualifying words “in the absence of any special contract” in section 152, see section 40(1) of that Act.

2. As to railway contracts see the Indian Railways Act, 1890 (9 of 1890), section 72. [Ed. The Indian Railways Act, 1890 (9 of 1890) has been repealed by the Railways Act, 1989 (24 of 1989), sec. 200.] As to the liability of common carriers, see the Carriers Act, 1865 (3 of 1865), section 8.

152. Bailee when not liable for loss, etc, of thing bailed -

1152. Bailee when not liable for loss, etc., of thing bailed. The bailee, in the absence of any special contract, is not responsible for the loss, destruction or deterioration of the thing bailed, if he has taken the amount of care of it described in section 151.

——————————

1. The responsibility of the Trustees of the Port of Madras constituted under the Madras Port Trust Act, 1905 (Madras Act 2 of 1905), in regard to goods has been declared to be that of a bailee under these sections, without the qualifying words “in the absence of any special contract” in section 152, see section 40(1) of that Act

153. Termination of bailment by bailee’s act inconsistent with conditions -

A contract of bailment is voidable at the option of the bailor, if the bailee does any act with regard to the foods bailed, inconsistent with the conditions of the bailment.

Illustration

A lets to B, for hire, a horse for his own riding. B drives the horse in his carriage. This is, at the option of A, a termination of the bailment.

154. Liability of bailee making unauthorised use of goods bailed -

If the bailee makes any use of the goods bailed which is not according to the conditions of the bailment, he is liable to make compensation to the bailor for any damage arising to the goods from or during such use of them.

Illustrations

(a) A lends a horse to B for his own riding only. B allows C, a member of his family, to ride the horse. C rides with care, but the horse accidentally falls and is injured. B is liable to make compensation to A for the injury done to the horse.

 (b) A hires a horse in Calcutta from B expressly to march to Banaras. A rides with due care, but marches to Cuttack instead. The horse accidentally falls and is injured. A is liable to make compensation to B for the injury to the horse.

155. Effect of mixture with bailor’s consent, of his goods with bailee’s -

If the bailee, with the consent of the bailor, mixes the goods of the bailor with his own goods, the bailor and the bailee shall have an interest, in proportion to their respective shares, in the mixture thus produced.

156. Effect of mixture, without bailor’s consent, when the goods can be separated -

If the bailee, without the consent of the bailor, mixes the goods of the bailor with his own goods and the goods can be separated or divided, the property in the goods remains in the parties respectively; but the bailee is bound to be bear the expense of separation or division, and any damage arising from the mixture.

Illustration

A bails 100 bales of cotton marked with a particular mark to B. B, without A’s consent, mixes the 100 bales with other bales of his own, bearing a different mark; A is entitled to have his 100 bales returned, and B is bound to bear all the expense incurred in the separation of the bales, and any other incidental damage.

157. Effect of mixture, without bailor’s consent, when the goods cannot be separated -

If the bailee, without the consent of the bailor, mixes the foods of the bailor with his own goods in such a manner that it is impossible to separate the goods bailed from the other goods, and deliver them back, the bailor is entitled to be compensated by the bailee for the loss of the goods.

Illustration

A bails a barrel of Cape flour worth Rs. 45 to B. B, without A’s consent, mixes the flour with country flour of his own, worth only Rs. 25 a barrel. B must compensate A for the loss of his flour.

158. Repayment, by bailor, of necessary expenses -

Where, by the conditions of the bailment, the goods are to be kept or to be carried, or to have work done upon them by the bailee for the bailor, and the bailee is to receive no remuneration, the bailors shall repay to the bailee the necessary expenses incurred by him for the purpose of the bailment.

159. Restoration of goods lent gratuitously

The lender of a thing for use may at any time require its return, if the loan was gratuitous, even through he lent it for a specified time or purpose. But if, on the faith of such loan made for a specified time or purpose, the borrower has acted in such a manner that the return of the thing lent before the time agreed upon would cause him losses exceeding the benefit actually derived by him from the loan, the lender must, if he compels the return. indemnify the borrower for the amount in which the loss so occasioned exceeds the benefits so derived.

160. Return of goods bailed, on expiration of time or a accomplishment of purpose -

It is the duty of the bailee to return, or deliver according to the bailor’s directions, the goods bailed, without demand, as soon as the time for which they were bailed has expired, or the purpose for which they were bailed has been accomplished.

161. Bailee’s responsibility when goods are not duly returned -

1161. Bailee’s responsibility when goods are not duly returned.—If by the fault of the bailee, the goods are not returned, delivered or tendered at the proper time, he is responsible to the bailor for any loss, destruction or deterioration of the goods from that time.

——————————

1. Section 161 has been declared to apply to the responsibility of the Trustees of the Port of Madras as to goods in their possession see the Madras Port Trust Act, 1905 (Madras Act 2 of 1905).

2. As to Railway contracts, see the Indian Railways Act, 1890 (9 of 1890), section 72 [Ed. The Indian Railways Act, 1890 (9 of 1980) has been repealed by the Railways Act, 1989 (24 of 1989), sec. 200.]

162. Termination of gratuitous bailment by death -

A gratuitous bailment is terminated by the death either of the bailor or of the bailee.

163. Bailer entitled to increase or profit from goods bailed -

In the absence of any contract to the contrary, the bailee is bound to deliver to the bailer, or according to his directions, any increase or profit which may have accrued from the goods bailed.

Illustration

A leaves a cow in the custody of B to be taken care of. The cow has a calf. B is bound to deliver the calf as well as the cow to A.

164. Bailor’s responsibility to bailee -

The bailor is responsible to the bailee for any loss which the bailee may sustain the reason that the bailor was not entitled to make the bailment, or to receive back the goods, or to give directions, respecting them.

165. Bailment by several joint owners -

If several joint owners of goods bail them, the bailee may deliver them back to, or according to the directions of, one joint owner without the consent of all in the absence of any agreement to the contrary.

166. Bailee not responsible on redelivery to bailor without title -

If the bailor has no title to the goods, and the bailee, in good faith, delivers them back to, or according to the directions of the bailor, the bailee is not responsible to the owner in respect of such delivery.1

——————————–

1. See the Indian Evidence Act, 1872 (1 of 1872), section 117.

167. Right of third person claiming goods bailed -

If a person, other than the bailor, claims goods bailed he may apply to the court to stop delivery of the goods to the bailor, and to decide the title to the goods.

168. Right to finder of goods may sue for specified reward offered -

The finder of goods has no right to use the owner for compensation for trouble and expense, voluntary incurred by him to preserve the goods and to find out the owner; but he may retain the goods again the owner until he receive such compensation; and where the owner has offered a specific required for the return of goods lost, the finder may sue for such reward, and may retain the goods until he received it.

169. When finder of thing commonly on sale may sell it -

When thing which is commonly the subject of sale is lost, if the owner cannot with reasonable diligence be found, or if he refuses upon demand, to pay the lawful charges of the finder, the finder may sell it -

 (1) when the thing is in danger of perishing or of losing the greater part of its value, or

 (2) when the lawful charges of the finder, in respect of the thing found, amount to two-thirds of its value.

170. Bailee’s particular lien -

Where the bailee has, in accordance with the purpose of the bailment, rendered any service involving the exercise of labour or skill in respect of the goods bailed he has in the absence of a contract to the contrary, a right to retain such goods until he receives due remuneration for the services he has rendered in respect of them.

Illustrations

(a) A delivers a rough diamond to B, a jeweller, to be cut and polished, which is accordingly done. B is entitled to retain the stone till he is paid for the services he has rendered.

 (b) A gives cloth to B, a tailor, to make into a coat. B promises A to deliver the coat as soon as it is finished, and to give a three months credit for the price. B is not entitled to retain the coat until he is paid.

171. General lien of bankers, factors, wharfinger, attorneys and policy brokers -

Bankers, factor, wharfingers, attorneys of a High Court and policy brokers may, in the absence of a contract to the contrary, retain as a security for a general balance of account, any goods bailed to them; but no other person have a right retain, as a security for which balance, goods, bailed to them, unless is an express contract to that effect.1

Banker’s lien

In mercantile system the Bank has a general lien over all forms of securities or negotiable instruments deposited by or on behalf of the customers in the ordinary course of banking business. The Bank has the liberty to adjust from the proceeds of the two FDR’s towards the dues to the Bank and if there is any balance left that would belong to the depositor; Syndicate Bank v. Vijay Kumar, AIR 1992 SC 1066.

General and particular lien

Section 171 of the Act is clear and categoric that unless a contract to the contrary is established by the plaintiffs, the bank’s right of lien will have to be accepted; Smt. K.S. Nagalambika v. Corporation Bank, AIR 2000 Kant 201.

Workman’s lien for remuneration

The proposition that the bailee, who exercises a lien, is not entitled to charge rent for storage of goods can never apply to a case where the lien is exercised for non-payment of rent or storage charges; Om Shankar Biyani v. Board of Trustees, Port of Calcutta, (2002) 3 SCC 168.

—————————–

1. As to lien of an agent, see section 221, infra. As to lien of a Railway Administration, see the Indian Railways Act, 1890 (9 of 1890), section 55. [Ed. The Indian Railways Act, 1890 (9 of 1890) has been repealed by the Railways Act, 1989 (24 of 1989) See. 200. Now see the Railways Act 1989 (24 of 1989, section 83.]

172. “Pledge”, “Pawnor”, and “Pawnee” defined -

The bailment of goods as security for payment of a debt or performance of a promise is called “pledge”. The bailor is in this case called “pawnor”. The bailee is called “pawnee”.

173. Pawnee’s right of retainer -

The pawnee may retain the goods pledged, not only for payment of the debt or the performance of the promise, but for the interests of the debt, and all necessary expenses incurred by him in respect to the possession or for the preservation of the goods pledged.

174. Pawnee not to retain for debt or promise other than for which goods pledged – presumption in case of subsequent advances -

The pawnee shall not, in the absence of a contract to that effect, retain the goods pledged for any debt or promise of other than the debtor promise for which they are pledged; but such contract, in the absence of anything to the contrary, shall be presumed in regard to subsequent advances made by the pawnee.

175. Pawnee’s right as to extraordinary expenses incurred -

The pawnee is entitled to receive from the pawnor extraordinary expenses incurred by him for the preservation of the goods pledged.

176. Pawnee’s right where pawnor makes default -

If the pawnor makes default in payment of the debt, or performance, at the stipulated time, or the promise, in respect of which the goods were pledged, the pawnee may bring as suit against the pawnor upon the debt or promise, and retain the goods pledged as a collateral security; or he may sell the thing pledged, on giving the pawnor reasonable notice of the sale.

If the proceeds of such sale are less than the amount due in respect of the debt or promise, the pawnor is still liable to pay the balance. If the proceeds of the sale are greater that the amount so due, the pawnee shall pay over the surplus to the pawnor.

Scope

It is the discretion of the pawnee to sell the goods in case the pawnor makes default but if the pawnee does not exercise that discretion no blame can be put on the pawenee and pawnee has the right to bring a suit for recovery of the debt and retain the goods pledged as collateral security; State Bank of India v. Smt. Neela Ashok Naik, AIR 2000 Bom 151.

177. Defaulting pawnor’s right to redeem -

If a time is stipulated for the payment of the debt, or performance of the promise, for which the pledged is made, and the pawnor makes default in payment of the debt or performance of the promise at the stipulated time, he may redeem the goods pledged at any subsequent time before the actual sale of them;1 but he must, on that case, pay, in addition, any expenses which have arisen from his default.

——————————–

  1.   For limitation, see the Limitation Act, 1963 (36 of 1963), Schedule 1.

178. Pledge by mercantile agent -

1[178. Pledge by mercantile agent.—Where a mercantile agent is, with the consent of the owner, in possession of goods or the documents of title to goods, any pledge made by him, when acting in the ordinary course of business of a mercantile agent, shall be as valid as if he were expressly authorised by the owner of the goods to make the same; provided that the pawnee acts in good faith and has not at the time of the pledge notice that the pawnor has not authority to pledge.

Explanation : In this section, the expression “mercantile agent” and “documents of title” shall have the meanings assigned to them in the Indian Sale of Goods Act, 1930 (3 of 1930).

———————————

1.  Sections 178 subs. by Act 4 of 1930, sec. 2, for original section 178.

178A. Pledge by person in possession under voidable contract -

1[178A. Pledge by person in possession under voidable contract.—When the pawnor has obtained possession of the other goods pledged by him under a contract voidable under section 19 of section 19A, but the contract has not been rescinded at the time of the pledge, the pawnee acquired a goods title to the goods, provided he acts in good faith and without notice of the pawnor’s defect of title.

———————————-

 1.  Sections 178A subs. by Act 4 of 1930, sec. 2, for original section 178.

179. Pledge where pawnor has only a limited interest -

Where person pledges goods in which he has only a limited interest, the pledge is valid to the extent of that interest.

180. Suit by bailor or bailee against wrong-doer -

If a third person wrongfully deprives the bailee of the use of possession of goods bailed, or does them any injury, the bailee is entitled to use such remedies as the owner might have used in the like case if no bailment has been made; and either the bailor or the bailee may bring a suit against a third person for such deprivation or injury.

181. Appointment of relief or compensation obtained by such suit –

Whatever is obtained by way of relief of compensation in any such suit shall, as between the bailor and the bailee, be dealt with according to their respective interests.

Chapter X – Agency, Appointment and Authority of Agents

182. “Agent” and “principal” defined -

An “agent” is a person employed to do any act for another, or to represent another in dealing with third persons. The person for whom such act is done, or who is so represented, is called the “principal”.

Principle of agency

D.e.s.u. is not an insurance agent within the meanings of life Insurance Corporation Act, 1956 and the Life Insurance Corporation of India (Agents) Regulations, 1972 but D.E.S.U. is certainly an agent as defined in section 182 of the Act. When there is no insurance agent as defined in the Regulations and the Insurance Act, general principles of the law of agency as contained in the Contract Act are to be applied; D.E.S.U. v. Basanti Devi, AIR 2000 SC 43.

183. Who may employ agent -

Any person who is of the age of majority according to the law to which he is subject, and who is of sound mind, may employ an agent.

Scope

Since the defendant is weak, mentally infirm and cannot comprehend for herself, the power of attorney which authorised to act as agent of the defendant had been exhausted because of the defendant’s incapacity; Mahendra Pratap Singh v. Padam Kumari Devi, AIR 1993 All 182.

184. Who may be an agent -

As between the principal and third persons, any person may become an agent, but no person who is not of the age of majority and sound mind can become an agent, so as to be responsible to the principal according to the provisions in that behalf herein contained.

185. Consideration not necessary.—-

No consideration is necessary to create an agency.

186. Agent’s authority may be expressed or implied.—

The authority of an agent may be expressed or implied.1

—————————

1. See, however, the Registration Act, 1908 (16 of 1908), section 33; See also the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 (5 of 1908), Schedule I, Order III, rule 4.

187. Definitions of express and implied -

An authority is said to be express when it is given by words spoken or written. An authority is said to be implied when it is to be inferred from the circumstances of the case; and things spoken or written, or the ordinary course of dealing, may be accounted circumstances of the case.

Illustration

A owns a shop in Serampor, living himself in Calcutta, and visiting the shop occasionally. The shop is managed by B, and he is in the habit of ordering goods from C in the name of A for the purposes of the shop, and of paying for them out of A’s funds with A’s knowledge. B has an implied authority from A to order goods from C in the name of A for the purposes of the shop.

188. Extent of agent’s authority –

An agent, having an authority to do an act, has authority do every lawful thing which is necessary in order to do so such act.An agent having an authority to carry on a business, has authority to do every lawful thing necessary for the purpose, or usually done in the course, of conducting such business.

Illustrations

 (a) A is employed by B, residing in London, to recover at Bombay a debt due to B. A may adopt any legal process necessary for the purpose of recovering the debt, and may give a valid discharge for the same.

 (b) A constitutes B his agent to carry on his business of a ship-builder. B may purchase timber and other materials, and hire workmen, for the purpose of carrying on the business.

189. Agent’s authority in an emergency -

An agent has authority, in an emergency, to do all such acts for the purpose of protecting his principal from loss and would be done by a person or ordinary prudence, in his own case, under similar circumstances.

Illustrations

 (a) An agent for sale may have goods repaired if it be necessary.

 (b) A consigns provisions to B at Calcutta, with directions to send them immediately to C, at Cuttack. B may sell the provisions at Calcutta, if they will not bear the journey to Cuttack without spoiling.

190. When agent cannot delegate -

An agent cannot lawful employ another to perform acts which he has expressly or impliedly undertaken to perform personally, unless by the ordinary custom of trade a sub-agent may, or, from the nature or agency, a sub-agent must, be employed.

191. “Sub-agent” defined -

A “sub-agent” is a person employed by, and acting undue the control of, the original agent in the business of the agency.

192. Representation of principal by sub-agent properly appointed -

Where a sub-agent is properly appointed, the principal is, so far as regards third persons, represented by the sub-agent, and is bound by and responsible for his acts, as if he were an agent originally appointed by the principal.

Agent’s responsibility for sub-agent: The agent is responsible to the principal for the acts of the sub-agent.Sub-agent’s responsibility:

The sub-agent is responsible for his acts to the agent, but not to the principal, except in cases of fraud, or wilful wrong.

193. Agent’s responsibility for sub-agent appointed without -

authorityWhere an agent, without having authority to do so, has appointed a person to act as a sub-agent stands towards such person in the relation of a principal to an agent, and is responsible for his act both to the principal and to third person; the principal is not represented, by or responsible for the acts of the person so employed, nor is that person responsible to the principal.

194. Relation between principal and person duly appointed by agent to act in business of agency -

When an agent, holding an express or implied authority to name another person to act for the principal in the business of the agency, has named another person accordingly, such person is not a sub-agent, but an agent of the principal for such part of the business of the agency as is entrusted to him.

Illustrations

(a) A directs B, his solicitor, to sell his estate by auction, and to employ an auctioneer for the purpose. B names C, an auctioneer, to conduct the sale. C is not a sub-agent, but is A’s agent for the conduct of the sale.

 (b) A authorizes B, a merchant in Calcutta, to recover the moneys due to A from C & Co. B instructs D, a solicitor, to take legal proceedings against C & Co. for the recovery of the money. D is not a sub-agent, but is solicitor for A.

195. Agent’s duty in naming such person -

In selecting such agent for his principal, an agent is bound to exercise the same amount of discretion as a man or ordinary prudence would exercise in his own case; and, if he does this, he is not responsible to the principal for the acts of negligence of the agent so selected.

Illustrations

(a) A instructs B, a merchant, to buy a ship for him. B employs a ship-surveyor of good reputation to choose a ship for A. The surveyor makes the choice negligently and the ship turns out to be unseaworthy and is lost. B is not, but the surveyor is, responsible to A.

 (b) A consigns goods to B, a merchant, for sale. B, in due course, employs an auctioneer in good credit to sell the goods of A, and allows the auctioneer to receive the proceeds of the sale. The auctioneer afterwards becomes insolvent without having accounted for the proceeds. B is not responsible to A for the proceeds.

196. Right of person as to acts done forhim without his authority, effect of ratification -

Where acts are done by one person on behalf of another, but without his knowledge or authority, he may elect to ratify or to disown such acts. If he ratifies them, the same effects will follow as if they had been performed by his authority.

197. Ratification may be expressed or implied -

Ratification may be expressed or may be implied in the conduct of the person on whose behalf the acts are done.

Illustrations

 (a) A, without authority, buys goods for B. Afterwards B sells them to C on his own account; B’s conduct implies a ratification of the purchase made for him by A.

 (b) A, without B’s authority, lends B’s money to C. Afterwards B accepts interest on the money from C. B’s conduct implies a ratification of the loan.

198. Knowledge requisite for valid ratification -

No valid ratification can be made by a person whose knowledge of the facts of the case is materially defective.

199. Effect of ratifying unauthorized act forming part of a transaction -

A person ratifying any unauthorized act done on his behalf ratifies the whole of the transaction of which such act formed a part.

200. Ratification of unauthorized act cannot injure third person -

An act done by one person on behalf of another, without such other person’s authority, which, if done with authority, would have the effect of subjecting a third person to damages, or of terminating any right or interest of a third person, cannot, by ratification, be made to have such effect.

Illustrations

(a) A, not being authorized thereto by B, demands, on behalf of B, the delivery of a chattel, the property of B, from C who is in possession of it. This demand cannot be ratified by B, so as to make C liable for damages for his refusal to deliver.

 (b) A holds a lease from B, terminable on three months’ notice. C, an unauthorized person, gives notice of termination to A. The notice cannot be ratified by B, so as to be binding on A.

201. Termination of Agency -

An agency is terminated by the principal revoking his authority, or by the agent renouncing the business of the agency; or by the business of the agency being completed; or by either the principal or agent dying or becoming of unsound mind; or by the principal being adjudicated an insolvent under the provisions of any Act for the time being in force for the relief of insolvent debtors.

202. Termination of Agency, where agent has an interest in subject-matter -

Where the agent has himself an interest in the property which forms the subject-matter of the agency, the agency cannot, in the absence of an express contract, be terminated to the prejudice of such interest.

Illustrations

 (a) A gives authority to B to sell A’s land, and to pay himself, out of the proceeds, the debts due to him from A. A cannot revoke this authority, nor can it be terminated by his insanity or death.

 (b) A consigns 1,000 bales of cotton to B, who has made advances to him on such cotton, and desires B to sell the cotton, and to repay himself out of the price the amount of his own advances. A cannot revoke this authority, nor is it terminated by his insanity or death.

Agent may enforce Contracts if personally enterested

A power of attorney executed in favour of an agent recording or recognizing an interest of the Agent/Attorney in the property which is the subject-matter of the Agency, cannot be revoked or terminated, even if the instrument does not state specifically that it is irrevocable, as then it would be a power coupled with an interest but a power of attorney simplicitor which merely authorised an agent to do certain acts in the name of or on behalf of the executant at any time in spite of the instrument that power of attorney be revoked or cancelled by the executant at any time in spite of the instrument stating that the Power of Attorney is irrevocable; Corporation Bank, Bangalore v. Lalitha H. Holla, AIR 1994 Kant 133.

203. When principal may revoke agent’s authority -

The principal may, save as is otherwise provided by the last preceding section, revoke the authority given to his agent at any time before the authority has been exercised so as to bind the principal.

204. Revocation where authority has been partly exercised -

The principal cannot revoke the authority given to his agent after the authority has been partly exercised, so far as regards such acts and obligations as arise from acts already done in the agency.

Illustrations

(a) A authorizes B to buy 1,000 bales of cotton on account of A and to pay for it out of A’s moneys remaining in B’s hands. B buys 1,000 bales of cotton in his own name, so as to make himself personally liable for the price. A cannot revoke B’s authroty so far as regards payment for the cotton.

(b) A authorizes B to buy 1,000 bales of cotton on account of A, and to pay for it out of A’s money remaining in B’s hands. B buys 1,000 bales of cotton in A’s name, and so as not to render himself personally liable for the price. A can revoke B’s authority to pay for the cotton.

205. Compensation for revocation by principal, or renunciation by agent -

Where there is an express or implied contract that the agency should be continued for any period of time, the principal must make compensation to the agent, or the agent to the principal, as the case may be, for any previous revocation or renunciation of the agency without sufficient cause.

206. Notice of revocation or renunciation -

Reasonable notice must be given of such revocation or renunciation; otherwise the damage thereby resulting to the principal or the agent, as the case may be, must be made good to the one by the other.

207. Revocation and Renunciation may be expressed or implied -

Revocation and renunciation may be expressed or may be implied in the conduct of the principal or agent respectively.

Illustration

A empowers B to let A’s house. Afterwards A lets it himself. This is an implied revocation of B’s authority.

208. When termination of agent’s authority takes effect as to agent, and as to third persons -

The termination of the authority of an agent does not, so far as regards the agent, take effect before it becomes known to him, or, so far as regards third persons, before it becomes known to them.

Illustrations

(a) A directs B to sell goods for him, and agrees to give B five per cent. commission on the price fetched by the goods. A afterwards by letter, revokes B’s authority. B after the letter is sent, but before he receives it, sells the goods for 100 rupees. The sale is binding on A, and B is entitled to five rupees as his commission.

 (b) A, at Madras, by letter directs B to sell for him some cotton lying in a warehouse in Bombay, and afterwards, by letter revokes his authority to sell, and directs B to send the cotton to Madras. B after receiving the second letter, enters into a contract with C, who knows of the first letter, but not of the second for the sale to him of the cotton. C pays B the money, with which B absconds. C’s payment is good as against A.

 (c) A directs B, his agent, to pay certain money to C. A dies, and D takes out probate to his will. B, after A’s death, but before hearing of it, pays the money to C. The payment is good as against D, the executor.

209. Agent’s duty on termination o agency by principal’s death or insanity -

When an agency is terminated by the principal dying or becoming of unsound mind, the agent is bound to take, on behalf of the representatives of his late principal, all reasonable steps for the protection and preservation of the interests entrusted to him.

210. Termination of Sub-agent’s authority -

The termination of the authority of an agent causes the termination (subject to the rules herein contained regarding the termination of an agent’s authority) of the authority of all sub-agents appointed by him.

211. Agent’s duty in conducting principal’s business -

An agent is bound to conduct the business of his principal according to the directions given by the principal, or, in the absence of any such directions, according to the custom which prevails in doing business of the same kind at the place where the agent conducts such business. When the agent acts otherwise, if any loss be sustained, he must make it good to his principal, and, if any profit accrues, he must account for it.

Illustrations

 (a) A, an agent engaged in carrying on for B a business, in which it is the custom to invest from time to time, at interest, the moneys which may be in hand, on its to make such investments. A must make good to B the interest usually obtained by such investments.

 (b) B, a broker in whose business it is not the custom to sell on credit, sells goods of A on credit to C, whose credit at the time was very high. C, before payment, becomes insolvent. B must make good the loss to A.

212. Skill and Diligence required from agent -

An agent is bound to conduct the business of the agency with as much skill as is generally possessed by persons engaged in similar business, unless the principal has notice of his want of skill. The agent is always bound to act with reasonable diligence, and to use such skill as he possesses; and to make compensation to his principal in respect of the direct consequences of his own neglect, want of skill or misconduct, but not in respect of loss or damage which are indirectly or remotely caused by such neglect, want of skill or misconduct.

Illustrations

 (a) A, a merchant in Calcutta, has an agent, B, in London, to whom a sum of money is paid on A’s account, with orders to remit. B retains the money for a considerable time. A, in consequence of not receiving the money, becomes insolvent. B is liable for the money and interest, from the day on which it ought to have been paid, according to the usual rate, and for any further direct loss—as, e.g., by variation of rate of exchange—but not further.

(b) A, an agent for the sale of goods, having authority to sell on credit, sells to B on credit, without making the proper and usual enquiries as to the solvency of B. B at the time of such sale is insolvent. A must make compensation to his principal in respect of any loss thereby sustained.

(c) A, an insurance-broker employed by B to effect an insurance on a ship, omits to see that the usual clauses are inserted in the policy. The ship is afterwards lost. In consequence of the omission of the clauses nothing can be recovered from the underwriters. A is bound to make good the loss to B.

(d) A, a merchant in England, directs B, his agent at Bombay, who accepts the agency, to send him 100 bales of cotton by a certain ship. B, having it in his power to send the cotton, omits to do so. The ship arrives safely in Engalnd. Soon after her arrival the price of cotton rises. B is bound to make good to A the profit which he might have made by the 100 bales of cotton at the time of ship arrived, but not any profit he might have made by the subsequent rise.

General

The defendant/respondent had grossly misconducted himself firstly when he communicated to the appellant that the goods had been purchased at the rate of Rs. 36 per pound when they had not been and further stating that these goods would be despatched as soon as the transporters strike was over. The defendant later on informed the appellant that the goods could not be purchased as their delivery was dependant on yet another party. The defendant had misinformed his principal and his misconduct squarely comes within section 212 of Contract Act; and the defendant must bear the brunt to pay the damages; Jayabharathi Corporation v. SV P.N. SN Rajasekara Nadar, AIR 1992 SC 596.

213. Agent’s accounts -

An agent is bound to render proper accounts to his principal on demand.

214. Agent’s duty of communicate with principal -

It is the duty of an agent, in cases of difficulty, to use all reasonable diligence in communicating with his principal, and in seeking to obtain his instructions.

215. Right to principal when agent deals, on his own account, in business of agency without principal’s consent -

If an agent deals on his own account in the business of the agency, without first obtaining the consent of his principal and acquainting him with all material circumstances which have come to his own knowledge on the subject, the principal may repudiate the transaction, if the case shows either that any material fact has been dishonestly concealed from him by the agent, or that the dealings of the agent have been disadvantageous to him.

Illustrations

(a) A directs B to sell A’s estate. B buys the estate for himself in the name of C. A, on discovering that B has bought the estate for himself, may repudiate the sale, if he can show that B has dishonestly concealed any material fact, or that the sale has been disadvantageous to him.

 (b) A directs B to sell A’s estate. B, on looking over the estate before selling it, finds a mine on the estate which is unknown to A. B informs A that he wishes to buy the estate for himself, but conceals the discovery of the mine. A allows B to buy, in ignorance of the existence of the mine. A, on discovering that B knew of the mine at the time he bought the estate, may either repudiate or adopt the sale at his option.

216. Principal’s right to benefit gained by agent dealing on his own account in business of agency -

If an agent, without the knowledge of his principal, deals in the business 6f the agency on his own account instead of on account of his principal, the principal is entitled to claim from the agent any benefit which may have resulted to him from the transaction.

Illustration

A directs B, his agent, to buy a certain house for him. B tells A it cannot be bought, and buys the house for himself. A may, on discovering that B has bought the house, compel him to sell it to A at the price he gave for it.

217. Agent’s right of retainer out of sums received on principal’s account -

An agent may retain, out of any sums received on account of the principal in the business of the agency, all moneys due to himself in respect of advances made or expenses properly incurred by him in conducting such business, and also such remuneration as may be payable to him for acting as agent.

218 . Agent’s duty to pay sums received for principal -

Subject to such deductions, the agent is bound to pay to his principal all sums received on his account.

219. When agent’s remuneration becomes due -

In the absence of any special contract, payment for the performance of any act is not due to the agent until the completion of such act; but an agent may detain moneys received by him on account of goods sold, although the whole of the goods consigned to him for sale may not have been sold, or although the sale may not be actually complete.

220. Agent not entitled to remuneration for business misconducted

An agent who is guilty of misconduct in the business of the agency is not entitled to any remuneration in respect of that part of the business which he has misconducted.

Illustrations

(a) A employs B to recover 1,00,000 rupees from C, and to lay it out on good security, B recovers the 1,00,000 rupees and lays out 90,000 rupees on good security, but lays out 10,000 rupees on security which he ought to have known to be bad, whereby A loses 2,000 rupees. B is entitled to remuneration for recovering the 1,00,000 rupees and for investing the 90,000 rupees. He is not entitled to any remuneration for investing the 10,000 rupees, and he must make good the 2,000 rupees to B.

 (b) A employs B to recover 1,000 rupees from C. Through B’s misconduct the money is not recovered. B is entitled to no remuneration for his services, and must make good the loss.

221. Agent’s lien on principal property

In the absence of any contract to the contrary, an agent is entitled to retain goods, papers, and other property, whether movable or immovable, of the principal received by him, until the amount due to himself for commission, disbursements and services in respect of the same has been paid or accounted for to him.

General

The lien of an agent extends only to the retention of the property till his dues are paid. At common law a legal lien merely confers on the holder of the articles in respect of which it was claimed, a passive right to detain the articles until the debt is paid. Such a lien cannot be enforced by sale of the goods; Kavita Trehan v. Balsara Hygiene Products Ltd., AIR 1992 Del 103.

222. Agent to be indemnified against consequences of lawful acts

The employer of an agent is bound to indemnify him against the consequences of all lawful acts done by such agent in exercise of the authority conferred upon him.

Illustrations

 (a) B, at Singapure, under instructions from A of Calcutta, contracts with C to deliver certain goods to him. A does not send the goods to B, and C sues B for breach of contract. B informs A of the suit, and A authorises him to defend the suit. B defends the suit, and is compelled to pay damages and costs, and incurs expenses. A is liable to B for such damages, costs and expenses.

 (b) B, a broker at Calcutta, by the orders of A, a merchant there, contracts with C for the purchase of 10 casks of oil for A. Afterwards A refuses to receive the oil, and C sues B. B informs A, who repudiates the contract altogether. B defends, but unsuccessfully, and has to pay damages and costs and incurs expenses. A is liable to B for such damages, costs and expenses.

223. Agent to be indemnified against consequences of acts done in good faith

Where one person employs another to do an act, and the agent does the act in good faith, the employer is liable to indemnify the agent against the consequences of that act, though it causes an injury to the rights of third persons

Illustrations

(a) A, a decree-holder and entitled to execution of B’s goods requires the officer of the Court to seize certain goods, representing them to be the goods of B. The officer seizes the goods, and is sued by C, the true owner of the goods. A is liable to indemnify the officer for the sum which he is compelled to pay to C, in consequence of obeying A’s directions.

 (b) B, at the request of A, sells goods in the possession of A, but which A had no right to dispose of. B does not know this, and hands over the proceeds of the sale to A. Afterwards C, the true owner of the goods, sues B and recovers the value of the goods and costs. A is liable to indemnify B for what he has been compelled to pay to C, and for B’s own expenses.

224. Non-Liability of employer of agent to do a Criminal Act -

Where one person employs another to do an act which is criminal, the employer is not liable to the agent, either upon an express or an implied promise, to indemnify him against the consequences of that act.

Illustrations

(a) A employs B to beat C, and agrees to indemnify him against all consequences of the act. B thereupon beats C, and has to pay damages to C for so doing. A is not liable to indemnify B for those damages.

(b) B, the proprietor of a newspaper, publishes, at A’s request, a libel upon C in the paper, and A agrees to indemnify B against the consequences of the publication, and all costs and damages of any action in respect thereof. B is sued by C and has to pay damages, and also incurs expenses. A is not liable to B upon the indemnity.

———————————-

 1.See section 24, supra.

225. Compensation to agent for injury caused by principal’s neglect

The principal must make compensation to his agent in respect of injury 1caused to such agent by the principal’s neglect or want of skill.

Illustration

A employs B as a bricklayer in building a house, and puts up the scaffolding himself. The scaffolding is unskilfully put up, and B is in consequence hurt. A must make compensation to B.

—————————————

1.Cf.the Indian Fatal Accidents Act, 1855 (13 of 1855).

226. Enforcement and Consequences of agent’s contracts -

Contracts entered into through an agent, and obligations arising from acts done by an agent, may be enforced in the same manner, and will have the same legal consequences, as if the contracts had been entered into and the acts done by the principal in person.

Illustrations

(a) A buys goods from B, knowing that he is an agent for their sale, but not knowing who is the principal. B’s principal is the person entitled to claim from A the price of the goods, and A cannot, in a suit by the principal, set-off against that claim a debt due to himself from B.

 (b) A, being B’s agent, with authority to receive money on his behalf, receives from C a sum of money due to B. C is discharged of his obligation to pay the sum in question to B.

227. Principal how far bound, when agent exceeds authority

When an agent does more than he is authorised to do, and when the part of what he does, which is within his authority, can be separated from the part which is beyond his authority, so much only of what he does as is within his authority is binding as between him and his principal.

Illustration

A, being owner of a ship and cargo, authorizes B to procure an insurance for 4,000 rupees on the ship. B procures a policy for 4,000 rupees on the ship, and another for the like sum on the cargo. A is bound to pay the premium for the policy on the ship, but not the premium for the policy on the cargo.

228. Principal not bound when excess of agent’s authority is not separable

Where an agent does more than he is authorised to do, and what he does beyond the scope of his authority cannot be separated from what is within it, the principal is not bound to recognise the transaction.

Illustration

A, authorizes B to buy 500 sheep for him. B buys 500 sheep and 200 lambs for one sum of 6,000 rupees. A may repudiate the whole transaction.

229. Consequences of notice given to agent

Any notice given to or information obtained by the agent, provided it be given or obtained in the course of the business transacted by him for the principal, shall, as between the principal and third parties, have the same legal consequence as if it had been given to or obtained by the principal.

Illustrations

(a) A is employed by B to buy from C certain goods, of which C is the apparent owner, and buys them accordingly. In the course of the treaty for the sale, A learns that the goods really belonged to D, but B is ignorant of that fact. B is not entitled to set-off a debt owing to him from C against the price of the goods.

 (b) A is employed by B to buy from C goods of which C is the apparent owner. A was, before he was so employed, a servant of C, and then learnt that the goods really belonged to D, but B is ignorant of that fact. In spite of the knowledge of his agent, B may set-off against the price of the goods a debt owing to him from C.

230. Agent cannot personally enforce, nor be bound by, contracts on behalf of principal

In the absence of any contract to that effect, an agent cannot personally enforce contracts entered into by him on behalf of his principal, nor is he personally bound by them.

PRESUMPTION OF CONTRACT TO THE CONTRARY. 

Such a contract shall be presumed to exist in the following cases :-

 (1) where the contract is made by an agent for the sale or purchase of goods for a merchant resident abroad;

 (2) where the agent does not disclose the name of his principal; and

 (3) where the principal, though disclosed, cannot be sued.

When agent can be sued

Before the agent can be sued it must be pleaded and shown that the principal is undisclosed and the contract, the breach of which is sued on was entered into by the agent as having contracted personally. Where the contract is entered into by agent contracting on behalf of a foreign principal who is named and disclosed, the agent can not be sued personally nor made personally liable; Midland Overseas v. “CMBT Tana”, AIR 1999 Bom 401.

231. Rights of Parties to a contract made by agent not disclosed

If an agent makes a contract with a person who neither knows, nor has reason to suspect, that he is an agent, his principal may require the performance of the contract; but the other contracting party has, as against the principal, the same rights as he would have had as against the agent if the agent had been the principal. If the principal discloses himself before the contract is completed, the other contracting party may refuse to fulfil the contract, if he can show that, if he had known who was the principal in the contract, or if he had known that the agent was not a principal, he would not have entered into the contract.

232. Performance of contract with agent supposed to be principal

Where one man makes a contract with another, neither knowing nor having reasonable ground to suspect that the other is an agent, the principal, if he requires the performance of the contract, can only obtain such performance subject to the rights and obligations subsisting between the agent and the other party to the contract.

Illustration

A, who owes 500 rupees to B, sells 1,000 rupees worth of rice to B. A is acting as agent for C in the transaction, but B has no knowledge nor reasonable ground of suspicion that such is the case. C cannot compel B to take the rice without allowing him to set-off A’s debt.

233. Right of person dealing with agent personally liable

In cases where the agent is personally liable, a person dealing with him may hold either him or his principal, or both of them, liable.

Illustrations

A enters into a contract with B to sell him 100 bales of cotton, and afterwards discovers that B was acting as agent for C. A may sue either B or C, or both, for the price of the cotton.

234. Consequence of Inducing agent or principal to act on belief that principal or agent will be held exclusively liable

When a person who has made a contract with an agent induces the agent to act upon the belief that’ the Principal only will be held liable, or induces the principal to act upon the belief that the agent only will be held liable, he cannot afterwards hold liable the agent or principal respectively.

235. Liability of pretended agent

A person untruly representing himself to be the authorised agent of another, and thereby inducing a third person to deal with him as such agent, is liable, if his alleged employer does not ratify his acts, to make compensation to the other in respect of any loss or damage which he has incurred by so dealing.

236. Person falsely contracting as agent not entitled to performance

A person with whom a contract has been entered into in the character of agent, is not entitled to require the performance of it if he was in reality acting, not as agent, but on his own account.

237. Liability of principal inducing belief that agent’s unauthorized acts were authorized

When an agent has, without authority, done acts or incurred obligations to third persons on behalf of his principal, the principal is bound by such acts or obligations, if he has by his words or conduct induced such third persons to believe that such act and obligations were within the scope of the agent’s authority.

Illustrations

 (a) A consigns goods to B for sale, and gives him instructions not to sell under a fixed price. C, being ignorant of B’s instructions, enters into a contract with B to buy the goods at a price lower than the reserved price. A is bound by the contract.

 (b) A entrusts B with negotiable instruments endorsed in blank. B sells them to C in violation of private orders from A. The sale is good.

238. Effect, on agreement, of misrepresentation or fraud by agent

Misrepresentations made, or frauds committed, by agents acting in the course of their business for their principals, have the same effect on agreements made by such agents as if such misrepresentations or frauds had been made or committed, by the principals; but misrepresentations made, or frauds, committed, by agents, in matters which do not fall within their authority, do not affect their principals.

Illustrations

(a) A, being B’s agent for the sale of goods, induces C to buy them by a misrepresentation, which he was not authorized by B to make. The contract is voidable, as between B and C, at the option of C.

 (b) A, the captain of B’s ship, signs bills of lading without having received on board the goods mentioned therein. The bills of lading are void as between B and the pretended consignor.

Chapter XI – Of Partnership

239-266 of Partnership

 [Rep. By the Indian Partnership Act, 1932 (9 OF 1932), SEC. 73 And Sch. II].

Sch. I .THE SCHEDULE Enactments repealed

 [Repealed by the Repealing and Amending Act, 1914 (10 of 1914) sec. 3 and Sch. II.

Hindu Succession Act

Section 1. Short title and extent

(1) This Act may be called the Hindu Succession Act  1956.

(2) It extends to the whole of India except the State of Jammu and Kashmir.

Section 2. Application of Act

(1) This Act applies-

(a) to any person, who is a Hindu by religion in any of its forms or developments including a Virashaiva, a Lingayat or a follower of the Brahmo, Parathana or Arya Samaj.

(b) to any person who is Buddhist, Jaina or Sikh by religion, and

(c) to any of other person who is not a Muslim, Christian, Parsi or Jew by religion unless it is proved that any such persons would not have been governed by the Hindu law or by custom or usage as part of that law in respect of any of the matters dealt with herein if this Act had not been passed.

Explanation.- The following persons are Hindus, Buddhists, Jainas or Sikhs by religion, as the case may be:-

(a) any child, legitimate or illegitimate, both of whose parents are Hindus, Buddhists, Jainas or Sikhs by religion.

(b) any child, legitimate or illegitimate one of whose parent is a Hindu, Buddhists, Jaina or Sikh by religion and who is brought up as a member of the tribe, community, group or family to which such parent belongs or belonged.

(c) any person who is convert or re-convert to the Hindu, Buddhist, Jaina or Sikh religion.

(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (1), nothing contained in this Act shall apply to the members of any Scheduled Tribe within the meaning of clause (25) of article 366 of the Constitution unless the Central Government, by notification in the Official Gazette, otherwise directs.

(3) The expression “Hindu” in any portion of this Act shall be construed as if it included a person who, through not a Hindu by religion, is, nevertheless, a person to whom this Act applies by virtue of the provisions contained inn this section.

STATE AMENDMENTS

Pondicherry:

In section 2, after sub-section (2) insert—

“(2A) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (1), nothing contained in this Act shall apply to the Renouncants of the Union territory of Pondicherry.”

[Regulation 7 of 1963, sec. 3 and First Sch. (w.e.f. 1-10-1963).]

Section 3. Definitions and interpretations

(1) In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,-

(a) “agnate”- one person is said to be an “agnate” of another if the two are related by blood or adoption wholly through males.

(b) “Aliyasantana law” means the system of law applicable to persons who, if this Act had not been passed, would have been governed by the Madras Aliyasantana Act, 1949, or by the customary Aliyasantana law with respect to the matter for which provision is made in this Act.

(c) “cognate”- one person is said to be a cognate of another if the two are related by blood or adoption but not wholly through males.

(d) the expression “custom” and “usage” signify and rule which having been continuously and uniformly observed for a long time, has obtained the force of law among Hindus in any local area, tribe, community, group or family:

Provided that the rule is certain and not unreasonable or opposed to public policy, and

Provided further that, in the case of a rule applicable only to a family it has not been discontinued by the family,

(e) “full blood”, “half blood” and ‘uterine blood”-

(i) two persons are said to be related to each other by full blood when they are descented from a common ancestor by the same wife, and by half blood when they are descended from a common ancestor but, by different wives.

(ii) two persons are said to be related to each other by uterine blood when they are descended from a common ancestres but by different husbands.

Explanation.- In this clause “ancestor” includes the father and “ancestress” the mother,

(f) ‘heir” means any person, male or female, who is entitled to succeed to the property of an intestate under this Act:

(g) “intestate” –a person is deemed to die intestate in respect of property of which he or she has not made at testamentary disposition capable of taking effect,

(h) “marumakkattayam law” means the system of law applicable to persons.-

(a) who, if this Act had not been passed would have been governed by the Madras Marumakkattayam Act, 1932, the Travancore Nayar Act, the Travancore Ezhava Act, the Travancore Nanjinad Vellala Act, the Travacore Kshatriya Act, the Travancore Krishnanavaka Marumakkathayee Act, the Cochin Marumakkathayam Act, or the Cochin Nayar Act with respect to the matters for which provision is made in this Act, or

(b) who belong to any community, the members of which are largely domiciled in the State of Travancore-Cochin or Madras 1(as it existed immediately before the 1st November, 1956) and who, if this Act had not been passed, would have been governed with respect to the matters for which provision is made in this Act by any system of inheritance in which descent is traced through the female line.

But does not include the aliyasantana law,

(i) “Nambudri law” means the system of law applicable to persons who, if this Act had not been passed, would have been governed by the Madras Nambudri Act, 1932, the Cochin Nambudri Act, or the Travancore Malayala Brahmin Act with respect to the matters for which provision is made in this Act.

(j) “related” means related by legitimate kinship :

Provided that illegitimate children shall be deemed to be related to their mothers and to one another, and their legitimate descendants shall be deemed to be related to them and to one another , and any word expressing relationship or denoting a relative shall be construed accordingly.

(2) In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires, words importing the masculine gender shall not be taken to include females.

———

1. Ins. by the Adaptation of Laws (No. 3) Order, 1956.

Section 4. Over-riding effect of Act

(1) Save as otherwise expressly provided in this Act,-

(a) any text, rule or interpretation of Hindu law or any custom or usage as part of that law in force immediately before the commencement of this Act shall cease to have effect with respect to any matter for which provision is made in this Act.

(b) any other law in force immediately before the commencement of this Act shall cease to apply to Hindus in so far as it is inconsistent with any of the provisions contained in this Act.

(2) For the removal of doubts it is hereby declared that nothing contained in this Act shall be deemed to affect the provision of any law for the time being in force providing for the prevention of fragmentation of agricultural holdings or for the fixation of ceilings or for the devolution of tenancy rights in respect of such holdings.

1[***]

——————————————-

1. Sub-section (2) omitted by Act 39 of 2005, sec. 2 (w.e.f. 9-9-2005). Sub-section (2), before omission, stood as under:

“(2) For the removal of doubts it is hereby declared that nothing contained in this Act shall be deemed to affect the provision of any law for the time being in force providing for the prevention of fragmentation of agricultural holdings or for the fixation of ceilings or for the devolution of tenancy rights in respect of such holdings.”

Chapter II – Intestate Succession

Section 5. Act not to apply to certain properties

This Act shall not apply to-

(i) any property succession to which is regulated by the Indian Succession Act, 1925 by reason of the provisions contained in section 21 of the Special Marriage Act, 1954.

(ii) any estate which descends to a single heir by the terms of any covenant or agreement entered into by the Ruler of any Indian State with the Government of India or by the term of any enactment passed before the commencement of this Act.

(iii) the Valiamma Thampuran Kovilagam Estate and the Palace Fund administered by the Palace Administration Board by reason of the powers conferred by Proclamation (IX of 1124) dated 29th June, 1949, promulgated by the Maharaja of Cochin.

State amendment

(a) Kerala State has passed an Act for the partition of the valiamma Thampuran Kovilegam Estate and the Palace Fund: Kerala Act 16 of 1961, sec. 10.

“10. Amendment of the Hindu Succession Act, 1956.—Clause (iii) of section 5 of the Hindu Succession Act, 1956 (Central Act 30 of 1956), shall be omitted with effect on and from the date of execution of the partition deed under section 6.”

Section 6. Devolution of interest of coparcenary property

1[6. Devolution of interest in coparcenary property. —(1) On and from the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005*, in a Joint Hindu family governed by the Mitakshara law, the daughter of a coparcener shall,—

(a) by birth become a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son;

(b) have the same rights in the coparcenary property as she would have had if she had been a son;

(c) be subject to the same liabilities in respect of the said coparcenary property as that of a son,

and any reference to a Hindu Mitakshara coparcener shall be deemed to include a reference to a daughter of a coparcener:

Provided that nothing contained in this sub-section shall affect or invalidate any disposition or alienation including any partition or testamentary disposition of property which had taken place before the 20th day of December, 2004.

(2) Any property to which a female Hindu becomes entitled by virtue of sub­-section (1) shall be held by her with the incidents of coparcenary ownership and shall be regarded, notwithstanding anything contained in this Act or any other law for the time being in force in, as property capable of being disposed of by her by testamentary disposition.

(3) Where a Hindu dies after the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005*, his interest in the property of a Joint Hindu family governed by the Mitakshara law, shall devolve by testamentary or intestate succession, as the case may be, under this Act and not by survivorship, and the coparcenary property shall be deemed to have been divided as if a partition had taken place and,—

(a) the daughter is allotted the same share as is allotted to a son;

(b) the share of the pre-deceased son or a pre-deceased daughter, as they would have got had they been alive at the time of partition, shall be allotted to the surviving child of such pre-deceased son or of such pre-deceased daughter; and

(c) the share of the pre-deceased child of a pre-deceased son or of a pre­-deceased daughter, as such child would have got had he or she been alive at the time of the partition, shall be allotted to the child of such pre-deceased child of the pre-deceased son or a pre-deceased daughter, as the case may be.

Explanation. —For the purposes of this sub-section, the interest of a Hindu Mitakshara coparcener shall be deemed to be the share in the property that would have been allotted to him if a partition of the property had taken place immediately before his death, irrespective of whether he was entitled to claim partition or not.

(4) After the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005*, no court shall recognise any right to proceed against a son, grandson or great­-grandson for the recovery of any debt due from his father, grandfather or great-grandfather solely on the ground of the pious obligation under the Hindu law, of such son, grandson or great-grandson to discharge any such debt:

Provided that in the case of any debt contracted before the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005*, nothing contained in this sub-section shall affect—

(a) the right of any creditor to proceed against the son, grandson or great-grandson, as the case may be; or

(b) any alienation made in respect of or in satisfaction of, any such debt, and any such right or alienation shall be enforceable under the rule of pious obligation in the same manner and to the same extent as it would have been enforceable as if the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005 had not been enacted.

Explanation. —For the purposes of clause (a), the expression “son”, “grandson” or “great-grandson” shall be deemed to refer to the son, grandson or great-grandson, as the case may be, who was born or adopted prior to the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005*.

(5) Nothing contained in this section shall apply to a partition, which has been effected before the 20th day of December, 2004.

Explanation. —For the purposes of this section “partition” means any partition made by execution of a deed of partition duly registered under the Registration Act, 1908 (16 of 1908) or partition effected by a decree of a court.]

Statement of Objects and Reasons [The Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005]

Section 6 of the Act deals with devolution of interest of a male Hindu in coparcenary property and recognises the rule of devolution by survivorship among the members of the coparcenary. The retention of the Mitakshara coparcenary property without including the females in it means that the females cannot inherit in ancestral property as their male counterparts do. The law by excluding the daughter from participating in the coparcenary ownership not only contributes to her discrimination on the ground of gender but also has led to oppression and negation of her fundamental right of equality guaranteed by the Constitution having regard to the need to render social justice to women, the States of Andhra Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka and Maharashtra have made necessary changes in the law giving equal right to daughters in Hindu Mitakshara coparcenary property. The Kerala Legislature has enacted the Kerala Joint Hindu Family System (Abolition) Act, 1975.

It is proposed to remove the discrimination as contained in section 6 of the Hindu Succession Act, 1956 by giving equal rights to daughters in the Hindu Mitakshara coparcenary property as the sons have.

State Amendment

Sections 6A to 6C

Karnataka:

After section 6 the following sections shall be inserted, namely:—

“6A. Equal rights to daugher in co-parcenary property.— Notwithstanding anything contained in section 6 of this Act—

(a) in a joint Hindu family governed by Mitakshara law, the daughter of a co-parcener shall by birth become a co-parcener in her own right in the same manner as the son and have the same rights in the co-parcenary property as she would have had if she had been a son inclusive of the right to claim by survivorship and shall be subject to the same liabilities and disabilities in respect thereto as the son;

(b) at a partition in such a joint Hindu family the co-parcenary property shall be so divided as to allot to a daughter the same share as is allotable to a son:

Provided that the share which a predeceased son or a predeceased daughter would have got at the partition if he or she had been alive at the time of the partition, shall be allotted to the surviving child of such predeceased son or of such predeceased daughter:

Provided further that the share allotable to the predeceased child of a predeceased son or of a predeceased daughter, if such child had been alive at the time of the partition, shall be allotted to the child of such predeceased child of the predeceased son or of such predeceased daughter, as the case may be;

(c) any property to which a female Hindu becomes entitled by virtue of the provisions of clause (a) shall be held by her with the incidents of co-parcenary ownership and shall be regarded, notwithstanding anything contained in this Act or any other law for the time being in force, as property capable of being disposed of by her by will or other testamentary disposition;

(d) nothing in clause (b) shall apply to a daughter married prior to or to a partition which had been effected before the commencement of Hindu Succession (Karnataka Amendment) Act, 1990.

6B. Interest to devolve by survivorship on death.— When a female Hindu dies after the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Karnataka Amendment) Act, 1990, having at the time of her death an interest in a Mitakshara co-parcenary property, her interest in the property shall devolve by survivorship upon the surviving members of the co-parcenary and not in accordance with this Act:

Provided that if the deceased had left any child or child of a pre-deceased child, the interest of the deceased in the Mitakshara co-parcenary property shall devolve by testamentary or intestate succession as the case may be under this Act and not by survivorship.

Explanations.— (1) For the purposes of this section the interest of female Hindu Mitakshara co-parcenary shall be deemed to be the share in the property that would have been allotted to her if a partition of the property had taken place immediately before her death, irrespective of whether she was entitled to claim partition or not.

(2) Nothing contained in the proviso to this section shall be construed as enabling a person who, before the death of the deceased had separated himself or herself from the co-parcenary, or any of his or her heirs to claim on intestacy a share in the interest referred to therein.

6C. Preferential right to acquire property in certain cases.— (1) Where, after the commencement of Hindu Succession (Karnataka Amendment) Act, 1990 an interest in any immovable property of an intestate or in any business carried by him or her, whether solely or in conjunction with others devolves under sections 6A or 6B upon two or more heirs and any one of such heirs proposes to transfer his or her interest in the property or business, the other heirs shall have a preferential right to acquire the interest proposed to be transferred.

(2) The consideration for which any interest in the property of the deceased may be transferred under sub-section (1) shall in the absence of any agreement between the parties, be determined by the court, on application, being made to it in this behalf, and if any person proposing to acquire the interest is not willing to acquire it for the consideration so determined, such person shall be liable to pay all costs of or incidental to the application.

(3) If there are two or more heirs proposing to acquire any interest under this section, that heir who offers the highest consideration for the transfer shall be preferred.

Explanation.— In this section ‘court’ means the court within the limits of whose jurisdiction the immovable property is situate or the business is carried on, and includes any other court which the State Government may by notification in the Official Gazette specify in this behalf.

[Vide Karnataka Act 23 of 1994, sec. 2 (w.e.f. 30-7-1994).]

———

1. Subs. by Act 39 of 2005, sec. 3, for section 6 (w.e.f. 9-9-2005). Section 6, before substitution, stood as under:

“6. Devolution of interest in coparcenary property.—When a male Hindu dies after the commencement of this Act, having at the time of his death an interest in a Mitakshara coparcenary property, his interest in the property shall devolve by survivorship upon the surviving members of the coparcenary and not in accordance with this Act:

Provided that, if the deceased had left him surviving a female relative specified in class I of the Schedule or a male relative specified in that class who claims through such female relative, the interest of the deceased in the Mitakshara coparcenary property shall devolve by testamentary or intestate succession, as the case may be, under this Act and not by survivorship.

Explanation 1.—For the purposes of this section, the interest of a Hindu Mitakshara coparcener shall be deemed to be the share in the property that would have been allotted to him if a partition of the property had taken place immediately before his death, irrespective of whether he was entitled to claim partition or not.

Explanation 2.—Nothing contained in the proviso to this section shall be construed as enabling a person who has separated himself from the coparcenary before the death of the deceased or any of his heirs to claim on intestacy a share in the interest referred to therein.”.

* Date of commencement 9-9-2005.

Section 7. Devolution of interest in the property of a tarwad, tavazhi, kutumba, kavaru or illom

(1) When a Hindu to whom the marumakkattayam or nambudri law would have applied if this Act had not been passed dies after the commencement of this Act, haing at the time of his or her death an interest in the property of a tarwad, tavazhi or illom, as the case may be, his or her interest in the property shall devolve by testamentary or intestate succession, as the case may be , under this Act and not according to the marumakkattayam or nambudri law.

Explanation.- For the purpose of this sub-section, the interest of a Hindu in the property of a tarward, tavashi or illom shall be deemed to be the share in the property of the tarward, tavazhi or illom, a the case may be, that would have fallen to him or her if a partition of that property per capital had been made immediately before his or her death among all the members of tarwad, tavashi or illom, a the case may be, then living, whether he or she was entitled to claim such partition or not under the marumakkattayam or nambudri law applicable to him or her, and such share shall be deemed to have been allotted to him or her absolutely.

(2) When a Hindu to whom the aliyasantana law would have applied if this Act had not been passed, dies after the commencement of this Act, having at the time of his or her death an undivided interest in the property of a kutumba or kavaru, as the case may be, his or her interest in the property shall devolve by testamentary or intestate succession, as the case may be, under this Act and not according to the aliyasantana law.

Explanation.- For the purpose of this sub-section, the interest of a Hindu in the property of kutumba or kavaru shall be deemed to be the share in the property of the kutumba or kavaru as the case may be, that would have fallen to him or her if a partition of that property per capita had been made immediately before his or her death among all the members of the kutumba or kavaru, as the case may be, then living, whether he or she was entitled to claim such partition or not under the aliyasantana law, and such share shall be deemed to have been allotted to him or her absolutely.

(3) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (1), when a sthananmdar dies after the commencement of this Act, sthanama property held by him shall devolve upon the members of the family to which the sthanamdar belonged and the heirs of the sthanamdar belonged and the heirs of the sthanamdar as if the sthanam property had been per capita immediately before the death of the sthanamdar among himself and the all the members of his family then living, and the shares falling to the members of his family and heirs of the sthanamdar shall be held by them as their separate property.

Explanation.- For the purposes of this sub-section, the family of a sthanamdar shall include every, branch of that family, whether divided or undivided, the male members of which would have been entitled by any custom or usage to succeed to the position of sthanamdar if this Act had not been passed.

State Amendment

Kerala:

In section 7, in sub-section (3)—

(a) between the words “him” and “shall”, the words “or her”, between the words “himself” and “and”, the words “or herself” and between the words “his” and “family” in the two places where they occur the words “or her” shall be respectively inserted;

(b) in the e xplanation , the word “male” shall be omitted;

(c) the existing Explanation shall be numbered as Explanation I and the following Explanation shall be added, namely:—

“Explanation II.— The devolution of Sthanam properties under sub-section (3) and their division among the members of the family and heirs shall not be deemed to have conferred upon them in respect of immovable properties any higher rights than the sthanamdar regarding eviction or otherwise as against tenants who were holding such properties under the sthani .”

[Vide Kerala Act 28 of 1958, sec. 27 (w.e.f. 18-5-1958).]

Section 8. General rules of succession in the case of males

The property of a male Hindu dying intestate shall devolve according to the provisions of this Chapter-

(a) firstly, upon the heirs, being the relatives specified in class 1 of the Schedule.

(b) secondly, if there is no heir of class I, then upon the heirs, being the relatives specified in class II of the Schedule.

(c) thirdly, if there is no heir of any of the two classes, then upon the agnates of the deceased, and

(d) lastly, if there is no agnate, then upon the cognate of the deceased.

Section 9. Order of succession among heirs in the Schedule

Among the heirs specified in the Schedule, those in class I shall take simultaneously and to the exclusion of all other heirs, those in the first entry in class II shall be preferred to those in the second entry, those in the second entry shall be preferred to those in the third entry, and so on in succession.

Section 10. Distribution of property among heirs in class 1 of the Schedule

The property of an intestate shall be divided among the heirs in class I of the Schedule in accordance with the following rules:-

Rule1.- The intestate’s widow, or if there are more widow than one, all the widows together, shall take one share.

Rule 2.- The surviving sons and daughter and the mother of the intestate shall each take one share.

Rule 3.- The heirs in the branch of each pre-deceased son or each pre-deceased daughter of the intestate shall take between them one share.

Rule 4.- The distribution of the share referred to in Rule 3-

(i) among the heirs in the branch of the pre-deceased son shall be son made that his widow (or widows together) and the surviving sons and daughters get equal portions, and the branch of his pre-deceased sons gets the same portion.

(ii) among the heirs in the branch of the pre-deceased daughter shall be so made that the surviving sons and daughters get equal portions.

Section 11. Distributions of property among heirs in class II of the Schedule

The property of an intestate shall be divided between the heirs specified in any one entry in class II of the Schedule so that they share equally.

Section 12. Order of succession among agnates and cognates

The order of succession among agnates or cognates, as the case may be, shall be determined in accordance with the rules of preference laid down hereunder:

Rule 1- Of two heirs, the one who has fewer or no degrees of ascent is preferred.

Rule 2.- Where the number of degrees of ascent is the same or none, that heir is preferred who has fewer or no degrees of descent.

Rule 3.- Where neither heirs is entitled to be preferred to the other under

Rule 1 or Rule 2 they take simultaneously.

Section 13. Computation of degrees

(1) For the purposes of determining the order of succession among agnates or cognates, relationship shall be reckoned from the intestate to the heir in terms of degrees of ascent or degrees of descent or both, as the case may be.

(2) Degrees of ascent and degrees of descent shall be computed inclusive of the intestate.

(3) Every generation constitutes a degree either ascending or descending.

Section 14. Property of a female Hindu to be her absolute Property

(1) Any property possessed by a female Hindu, whether acquired before or after the commencement of this Act, shall be held by her as full owner thereof and not as a limited owner.

Explanation.- In this sub-section, “property” includes both movable and immovable property acquired by a female Hindu by inheritance or devise, or at a partition, or in lieu of arrears of maintenance, or by gift from any person, whether a relative or note, before, at or after her marriage, or by her own skill or exertion, or by purchase or by prescription, or in any other manner whatsoever, and also any such property held by her as stridhana immediately before the commencement of this Act.

(2) Nothing contained in sub-section (1) shall apply to any property acquired by way of gift or under a will or any other instrument or under a decree or order of a civil court or under an award where the terms of the gift, will or other instrument or the decree, order or award prescribe a restricted estate in such property.

Section 15. General rules of succession in the case of female Hindus

(1) The property of a female Hindu dying intestate shall devolve according to the rules set out in section 16,-

(a) firstly, upon the sons and daughters (including the children of any pre-deceased son or daughter) and the husband.

(b) secondly, upon the heirs of the husband.

(c) thirdly, upon the heirs of the father, and

(d) fourthly, upon the heirs of the father, and

(e) lastly, upon the heirs of the mother.

(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (1),-

(a) any property inherited by a female Hindu from her father or mother shall devolve, in the absence of any son or daughter of the deceased (including the children of any pre-deceased son or daughter) not upon the other heirs referred to in sub-section (1) in the order specified therein, but upon the heirs of the father, and

(b) any property inherited by a female Hindu from her husband or from her father-in-law shall devolve, in the absence of any son or daughter of the deceased (including the children of any pre-deceased son or daughter ) not upon the other heirs referred to in sub-section (1) in the order specified therein, but upon the heirs of the husband.

Section 16. Order of succession and manner of distribution among heirs of a female Hindu

The order of succession among the heirs referred to in section 15 shall be, and the distribution of the intestate property among those heirs shall take place according to the following rules, namely:-

Rule 1 .- Among the heirs specified in sub-section (1) of section 15, those in one entry shall be preferred to those in any succeeding entry and those including in the same entry shall take simultaneously.

Rule 2.- If any son or daughter of the intestate had pre-deceased the intestate leaving his or her own children alive at the time of the intestate’ death, the children of such son or daughter shall take between them the share which such son or daughter would have taken if living at the intestate’s death.

Rule 3.—The devolution of the property of the intestate on the heirs referred to in clauses (b), (d) and (e) of sub-section (1) and in sub-section (2) to section 15 shall be in the same order and according to the same rules as would have applied if the property had been the father’s or the mother’s or the husband’s as the case may be, and such person had died intestate in respect thereof immediately after the intestate’s death.

Section 17. Special provisions respecting persons governed by marumakkattayam and aliyyasantana laws

The provisions of sections, 8,10, 15 and 23 shall have effect in relation to persons who would have been governed by the marumakkattayam law or aliyasantana law if this Act had not been passed as if-

(i) for such clauses (c) and (d) of section 8, the following had been substituted, namely :- ” (c) thirdly, the there is no heirs of any of the two classes, then upon his relatives, whether agnates or cognates”.

(ii) for clauses (a) to (e) of sub-section (1) of section 15, the following had been substituted, namely:-

“(a) firstly, upon the sons and daughters (including the children of any pre-deceased son or daughter) and the mother.

(b) secondly, upon the father and the husband.

(c) secondly, upon the father and the husband.

(d) fourthly, upon the heirs of the father, and

(e) lastly, upon the heirs of the husband”.

(iii) clause (a) of sub-section (2) of section 15 had been omitted.

(iv) section 23 had been omitted

Section 18. Full blood preferred to half blood

Heirs related to an intestate by full blood shall be preferred to heirs related by half blood, if the nature of the relationship is the same in every other respect.

Section 19. Mode of succession of two or more heirs

If two or more heirs succeed together to the property of an intestate, they shall take the property:-

(a) save as otherwise expressly provided in this Act, per capita and not per stripes, and

(b) as tenants-in common and not as joint tenants.

Section 20. Right of child in womb

A child who was in the womb at the time of the death of an intestate and who is subsequently born alive have the same right to inherit to the intestate as if he or she had been born before the death of the intestate, and the inheritance shall be deemed to vest in such as case with effect from the date of the death of the intestate.

Section 21. Presumption in cases of simultaneous deaths

Where two persons have died in circumstances rendering it uncertain whether either of them, and if so which, survived the other then, for all purposes affecting succession to property, it shall be presumed, until the contrary is proved, that the younger survived the elder.

Section 22. Preferential right to acquire property in certain cases

(1) Where, after the commencement of this Act, interest in any immovable property of an intestate, or in any business carried on by him or her, whether solely or in conjunction with others, devolve upon two or more heirs specified in class 1 of the Schedule, and any one of such heirs proposes to transfer his or her interest in the property or business, the other heirs shall have a preferential right to acquire the interest proposed to be transferred.

(2) The consideration for which any interest in the property of the deceased may be transferred under this section shall, in the absence of any agreement between the parties, be determined by the Court on application being made to it in this behalf, and if any person proposing to acquire the interest is not willing to acquire it for the consideration so determined, such person shall be liable to pay all costs of or incident to the application.

(3) If there are two or more heirs specified in class 1 of the Schedule proposing to acquire any interest under this section, that heir who offers the highest consideration for the transfer shall be preferred.

Explanation.- In this section, ‘court” means the court within the limits of whose jurisdiction the immovable property is situate or the business is carried on, and includes any other court which the State Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette, specify in this behalf.

Section 23. Special provision respecting dwelling houses

1[23. Special provision respecting dwelling houses. —[ Rep. by the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005 (39 of 2005), sec. 4 (w.e.f. 9-9-2005) .]]

Statement of Objects and Reasons [The Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005]

Section 23 of the Act disentitles a female heir to ask for partition in respect of a dwelling house wholly occupied by a joint family until the male heirs choose to divide their respective shares therein. It is also proposed to omit the said section so as to remove the disability on female heirs contained in that section.

——-

1. Section 23, before repeal by Act 39 of 2005, stood as under:

“23. Special provision respecting dwelling houses. —Where a Hindu intestate has left surviving him or her both male and female heirs specified in class I of the Schedule and his or her property includes a dwelling-house wholly occupied by members of his or her family, then, notwithstanding anything contained in this Act, the right of any such female heir to claim partition of the dwelling-house shall not arise until the male heirs choose to divide their respective shares therein; but the female heir shall be entitled to a right of residence therein:

Provided that where such female heir is a daughter, she shall be entitled to a right of residence in the dwelling-house only if she is unmarried or has been deserted by or has separated from her husband or is a widow.”

Section 24. Certain widows re-marrying may not inherit as widows

1[24. Certain widows re-marrying may not inherit as widows. —[ Rep. by the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005 (39 of 2005), sec. 5 (w.e.f. 9-9-2005) .]]

——-

1. Section 24, before repeal by Act 39 of 2005, stood as under:

“24. Certain widows re-marrying may not inherit as widows. —Any heir who is related to an intestate as the widow of a pre-deceased son, the widow of a pre-deceased son or the widow of a brother shall not be entitled to succeed to the property of the intestate as such widow, if on the date the succession opens, she has re-married.”

Section 25. Murderer disqualified

A person who commits murder or abets the commission of murder shall be disqualified from inheriting the property of the person murdered, or any other property in furtherance of the succession to which he or she committed or abetted the commission of the murder.

Section 26. Convert’s descendants disqualified

Where, before or after the commencement of this Act, a Hindu has ceased or ceases to be a Hindu by conversion to another religion, children born to him or her after such conversion and their descendants shall be disqualified from inheriting the property of their Hindu relatives, unless such children or descendants are Hindus at the time when the succession opens.

Section 27. Succession when heir disqualified

If any person is disqualified from succeeding to any property on the ground of any disease, defect r deformity, as save as provided in this Act, on any other ground whatsoever.

Section 28. Disease, defect, etc. not to disqualify

No person shall be disqualified form succeeding to any property on the ground of any disease, defect or deformity, or save as provided in this Act, on any other ground whatsoever.

Section 29. Failure of heirs

If an intestate has left no heir qualified to succeed to his or her property in accordance with the provisions of this Act, such property shall devolve on the government; and the government shall take the property subject to all the obligations and liabilities to which an heir would have been subject.

State Amendments

Chapter IIA

Andhra Pradesh:

After Chapter II, insert the following Chapter, namely:—

“Chapter IIA

Succession by survivorship

29A. Equal rights to daughter in coparcenary property.— Notwithstanding anything contained in section 6 of this Act—

(i) in a joint Hindu family governed by Mitakshara Law, the daughter of a coparcener shall by birth, become a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son and have the same rights in the coparcenary property as she would have had if she had been a son, inclusive of the right to claim by survivorship; and shall be subject to the same liabilities and disabilities in respect thereto as the son;

(ii) at a partition in such a joint Hindu family the coparcenary property shall be so divided as to allot to a daughter the same share as is allotable to a son:

Provided that the share which a pre-deceased son or a pre-deceased daughter would have got at the partition if he or she had been alive at the time of the partition shall be allotted to the surviving child of such pre-deceased son or of such pre-deceased daughter:

Provided further that the share allotable to the pre-deceased child of a pre-deceased son or of a pre-deceased daughter, if such child had been alive at the time of the partition, shall be allotted to the child of such pre-deceased child of the pre-deceased son or of the pre-deceased daughter as the case may be;

(iii) any property to which a female Hindu becomes entitled by virtue of the provisions of clause (i) shall be held by her with the incidents of coparcenary ownership and shall be regarded, notwithstanding anything contained in this Act or any other law for the time being in force, as property capable of being disposed of by her by will or other testamentary disposition;

(iv) Nothing in clause (ii) shall apply to a daughter married prior to or to a partition which had been effected before the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Andhra Pradesh Amendment) Act, 1986.

29B. Interest to devolve by survivorship on death.— When a female Hindu dies after the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Andhra Pradesh Amendment) Act, 1986 having at the time of her death an interest in a Mitakshara coparcenary property, her interest in the property shall devolve by survivorship upon the surviving members of the coparcenary and not in accordance with this Act:

Provided that if the deceased had left any child or child of a pre-deceased child, the interest of the deceased in the Mitakshara coparcenary property shall devolve by testamentary or intestate succession as the case may be, under this Act and not by survivorship.

Explanation I .—For the purposes of this section the interest of a female Hindu Mitakshara coparcener shall be deemed to be the share in the property that would have been allotted to her if a partition of the property had taken place immediately before her death irrespective of whether she was entitled to claim partition or not.

Explanation II .—Nothing contained in the proviso this section shall be construed as enabling a person who before the death of the deceased, had separated himself or herself from the coparcenary or any of his or her heirs to claim on intestacy a share in the interest referred to therein.

29C. Preferential right to acquire property in certain cases.— (1) Where, after the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Andhra Pradesh Amendment) Act, 1986 an interest in any immovable property of an intestate or in any business carried on by him or her, whether solely or in conjunction with others, devolves under section 29A or section 29B upon two or more heirs, and any one of such heirs proposes to transfer his or her interest in the property or business, the other heirs shall have a preferential right to acquire the interest proposed to be transferred.

(2) The consideration for which any interest in the property of the deceased may be transferred under this section shall, in the absence of any agreement between the parties, be determined by the court on application being made toit in this behalf, and if any person proposing to acquire the interest is not willing to acquire it for the consideration so determined, such person shall be liable to pay all costs of or incidental to the application.

(3) If there are two or more heirs proposing to acquire any interest under this section, that heir who offers the highest consideration for the transfer shall be preferred.

Explanation. —In his section ‘court’ means the court within the limits of whose jurisdiction the immovable property is situate or the business is carried on, and includes any other court which the State Government may, by notification in the Andhra Pradesh Gazette, specify in this behalf.”

[Vide Andhra Pradesh Act 13 of 1986, sec. 2 (w.r.e.f. 5-9-1985).]

Maharashtra:

After Chapter II, insert the following Chapter, namely:—

“CHAPTER IIA

SUCCESSION BY SURVIVORSHIP

29A. Equal rights of daughter in coparcenary property.— Notwithstanding anything contained in section 6 of this Act—

(i) in a joint Hindu family governed by the Mitakshara Law, the daughter of a coparcener shall, by birth, become a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as a son and have the same rights in the coparcenary property as she would have had if she had been a son inclusive of the right to claim by survivorship; and shall be subject to the same liabilities and disabilities in respect thereto as the son;

(ii) at a partition in a joint Hindu family referred to in clause (i), the coparcenary property shall be so divided as to allot to a daughter the same share as is allotable to a son:

Provided that the share which a pre-deceased son or a pre-deceased daughter would have got at the partition if he or she had been alive at the time of the partition, shall be allotted to the surviving child of such pre-deceased son or of such pre-deceased daughter:

Provided further that the share allotable to the pre-deceased child of a pre-deceased son or of a pre-deceased daughter, if such child had been alive at the time of the partition, shall be allotted to the child of such pre-deceased child of the pre-deceased son or of the pre-deceased daughter as the case may be;

(iii) any property to which a female Hindu becomes entitled by virtue of the provisions of clause (i) shall be held by her with the incidents of coparcenary ownership and shall be regarded, notwithstanding anything contained in this Act or any other law for the time being in force, as property capable of being disposed of by her by will or other testamentary disposition;

(iv) nothing in this Chapter shall apply to a daughter married before the date of the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Maharashtra Amendment) Act, 1994;

(v) nothing in clause (ii) shall apply to a partition which has been effected before the date of the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Maharashtra Amendment) Act, 1994;

29B. Interest to devolve by survivorship on death.— When a female Hindu dies after the date of the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Maharashtra Amendment) Act, 1994, having, at the time of her death, an interest in a Mitakshara coparcenary property by virtue of the provisions of section 29A, her interest in the property shall devolve by survivorship upon the surviving members of the coparcenary and not in accordance with this Act:

Provided that, if the deceased had left any child or child of a pre-deceased child, the interest of the deceased in the Mitakshara coparcenary property shall devolve by testamentary or intestate succession, as the case may be, under this Act and not by survivorship.

Explanation I.—For the purposes of this section, the interest of a female Hindu in Mitakshara coparcener property shall be deemed to be the share in the property that would have been allotted to her if a partition of the property had taken place immediately before her death, irrespective of whether she was entitled to claim partition or not.

Explanation II.—Nothing contained in the proviso to this section shall be construed as enabling a person who, before the death of the deceased, had separated himself or herself from the coparcenary or any of his or her heirs to claim on intestacy a share in the interest referred to therein.

29C. Preferential right to acquire property in certain cases.— (1) Where, after the date of the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Maharashtra Amendment) Act, 1994 an interest in any immovable property of any intestate or in any business carried on by him or her, whether solely or in conjunction with others, devolves under section 29A or section 29B upon two or more heirs, and any one of such heirs proposes to transfer his or her interest in the property or business, the other heirs shall have a preferential right to acquire the interest proposed to be transferred.

(2) The consideration for which any interest in the property of the deceased may be transferred under this section shall, in the absence of any agreement between the parties, be determined by the court on application being made to it in this behalf, and if any person proposing to acquire the interest is not willing to acquire it for the consideration so determined, such person shall be liable to pay all costs of or incidental to the application.

(3) If there are two or more heirs proposing to acquire any interest under this section, then, the heir who offers the highest consideration for the transfer shall be preferred.

Explanation .—In this section “court” means the court within the limits of whose jurisdiction the immovable property is situate or the business is carried on, and includes any other court which the State Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette, specify in this behalf.”

[Vide Maharashtra Act 39 of 1994, sec. 2 (w.e.f. 22-6-1994).]

Tamil Nadu:

After Chapter II, insert the following Chapter, namely:—

“Chapter IIA

Succession by survivorship

29A. Equal rights to daughter in coparcenary property.— Notwithstanding anything contained in section 6 of this Act,—

(i) in a joint Hindu family governed by Mitakshara Law, the daughter of a coparcener shall by birth become a coparcener in her own right in thesame manner as a son and have the same rights in the coparcenary property as she would have had if she had been a son, inclusive of the right to claim by survivorship; and shall be subject to the same liabilities and disabilities in respect thereto as the son;

(ii) at a partition in such a Joint Hindu Family the coparcenary property shall be so divided as to allot to a daughter the same share as is allotable to son:

Provided that the share which a pre-deceased son or a pre-deceased daughter would have got at the partition if he or she had been alive at the time of the partition shall be allotted to the surviving child of such pre-deceased son or of such pre-deceased daughter:

Provided further that the share allotable to the pre-deceased child of pre-deceased son or of a pre-deceased daughter, if such child had been alive at the time of the partition, shall be allotted to the child of such pre-deceased child of the pre-deceased son or of the pre-deceased daughter, as the case may be;

(iii) any property to which a female Hindu becomes entitled by virtue of the provisions of clause (i) shall be held by her with the incidents of coparcenary ownership and shall be regarded, notwithstanding anything contained in this Act or any other law for the time being in force, as property capable of being disposed of by her by will or other testamentary disposition:

(iv) nothing in this Chapter shall apply to a daughter married before the date of the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Tamil Nadu Amendment) Act, 1989;

(v) nothing in clause (ii) shall apply to a partition which had been effected before the date of the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Tamil Nadu Amendment) Act, 1989.

29B. Interest to devolve by survivorship on death.— When a female Hindu dies after the date of the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Tamil Nadu Amendment) Act, 1989, having at the time of her death, an interest in a Mitakshara coparcenary property by virtue of the provisions of section 29A, her interest in the property shall devolve by survivorship upon the surviving members of the coparcenary and not in accordance with this Act:

Provided that if the deceased had left any child or child of a pre-deceased child, the interest of the deceased in the Mitakshara coparcenary property shall devolve by testamentary or intestate succession, as the case may be, under this Act and not by survivorship.

Explanation I.— For the purposes of this section, the interest of a female Hindu Mitakshara coparcener shall be deemed to be the share in the property that would have been allotted to her if a partition of the property had taken place immediately before her death, irrespective of whether she was entitled to claim partition or not.

Explanation II.— Noting contained in the proviso to this section shall be construed as enabling a person who, before the death of the deceased had separated himself or herself from the coparcenary or any of his or her heirs to claim on intestacy a share in the interest referred to therein.

29C. Preferential right to acquire property in certain cases.— (1) Where, after the date of the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Tamil Nadu Amendment) Act, 1989, an interest in any immovable property of an intestate or in any business carried on by him or her, whether solely or in conjunction with others, devolves under section 29A or section 29B upon two or more heirs, and any one of such heirs proposes to transfer his or her interest in the property or business, the other heirs shall have a preferential right to acquire the interest proposed to be transferred.

(2) The consideration for which any interest in the property of the deceased may be transferred under this section shall, in the absence of any agreement between the parties, be determined by the court on application being made to it in this behalf, and if any person proposing to acquire the interest is not willing to acquire it for the consideration so determined, such person shall be liable to pay all costs of, or incidental to, the application.

(3) If there are two or more heirs proposing to acquire any interest under this section, that heir who offers the highest consideration for the transfer shall be preferred.

Explanation.— In this section “court” means the court within the limits of whose jurisdiction the immovable property is situate or the business is carried on and includes any other court which the s tate Government may, by notification in the Tamil Nadu Government Gazette, specify in this behalf.

[Vide Tamil Nadu Act 1 of 1990 sec. 2 (w.r.e.f. 25-3-1989).]

Chapter III – Testamentary Succession

Section 30. Testamentary succession

1[***] Any Hindu may dispose of by will or other testamentary disposition any property, which is capable of being so 2[disposed of by him or by her], in accordance with the provisions of the Indian Succession Act, 1925 (39 of 1925), or any other law for the time being in force and applicable to Hindus.

Explanation.— The interest of a male Hindu in a Mitakshara coparcenary property or the interest of a member of a tarwad, tavazhi, illom, kutumba or kavaru in the property of the tarwad, tavazhi, illom, kutumba or kavaru shall notwithstanding anything contained in this Act or in any other law for the time being in force, be deemed to be property capable of being disposed of by him or by her within the meaning of this 3[section.]

4[***]

———-

1. The brackets and figure “(1)” omitted by Act 58 of 1960, sec. 3 and Sch. II (w.e.f. 26-12-1960).

2. Subs. by Act 39 of 2005, sec. 6, for “disposed of by him” (w.e.f. 9-9-2005).

3. Subs. by Act 56 of 1974, sec. 3 and Sch. II, for “sub-section”.

4. Sub-section (2) omitted by Act 78 of 1956, sec. 29 (w.e.f. 21-12-1956).

Chapter IV – Repeals

Section 31. Repeals

Rep. By Repealing and Amending Act, 1960 (58 of 1960) Section 2 and Sch.1

THE SCHEDULE

HEIRS IN CLASS AND CLASS II

Son, daughter, widow, mother, son of a pre-deceased son, daughter of a pre-deceased son, son of a pre-deceased daughter, duaghter of a pre-deceased daughter, widow of a pre-deceased son, 1son of pre-deceased son of a pre-deceased son, daughter of a pre-deceased son of a pre-deceased son, widow of a pre-deceased son of a pre-deceased son.

Class II

1. Father

2. (1) Son’s daughter’s son (2) son’s daughter’s daughter, (3) brother,(4) sister.

III. (1) Daughter’s son’s son, (2) daughter’s son’s daughter , (3) daughter’s daughter’s son, (4) daughter’s daughter’s daughter.

IV. (1) Brother’s son (2) Sister’s son, (3) brother’s daughter (4) Sister’s daughter.

V. Father’s father. Father’s mother.

VI. Father’s widow, brother’s widow.

VII Father’s brother, father’s sister.

VIII Mother’s father, mother’s sister.

IX Mother’s brother, mother’s sister.

Explanation.- In this Schedule, references to a brother or sister do not include references to a brother or sister by uterine blood.

—————–

1. Added by Act 39 of 2005, sec. 7 (w.e.f. 9-9-2005).

Indian Divorce Act

Chapter I – Preliminary

Section 1. Short title, commencement of Act

An Act to amend the law relating to Divorce and Matrimonial Causes.

[26th February, 1869.]

PREAMBLE- WHEREAS it is expedient to amend the law relating to the divorce of persons professing the Christian religion, and to confer upon certain Courts jurisdiction in matters matrimonial; it is hereby enacted as follows: -

Section 2. Extent of Act.

This Act extends to [the whole of India [except the State of Jammu and Kashmir.

Extent of power to grant relief generally, and to make decrees of dissolution, or of nullity. – Nothing hereinafter contained shall authorise and Court to grant any relief under this Act except where the petitioner [or respondent] professes the Christian religion, or to make decrees of dissolution of marriage except where the parties to the marriage are domiciled in India at the time when the petition is presented, or to make decrees of nullity of marriage except where the marriage has been solemnized in India and the petitioner is resident in India at the time of presenting the petition, or to grant any relief under this Act, other than a decree of dissolution of marriage or of nullity of marriage, except where the petitioner resides in India at the time of presenting the petition.

Section 3. Interpretation-clause.

In this Act, unless there by something repugnant in the subject or context, -

“High Court”.-[(1) “High Court” means with reference to any area:-

(a) in a State, the High Court of Delhi;

(b) in Delhi, High Court of Delhi;

(bb) In Himachal Pradesh, the High Court of Punjab and Haryana upto and inclusive of the 30th April, 1967 and the High Court of Delhi thereafter;]

(c) In Manipur and Tripura, the High Court of Assam;

(d) In the Andaman and Nicobar Islands, the High Court at Calcutta;

(e) In [Lakshadweep ], the High Court of kerla;

(ee) In Chandigarh, the High Court of Punjab and Haryana;

and in the case of any petition under this Act, “High Court” means the High Court for the area where the husband and wife reside or last resided together :

“District Judge.- (2) “District Judge” means a Judge of a principal civil court of original jurisdiction however designated:

“District Court”.-(3) “District Court” means, in the case of any petition under this Act, the Court of the District Judge within the local limits of whose ordinary jurisdiction, or of whose jurisdiction under this Act, the husband and wife reside or last resided together:

“Court”. -(4) “Court” means the High Court or the District Court, as the case may be:

“Minor children”. – (5) “minor children” means, in the case of sons of Native fathers, boys, who have not completed the age of sixteen years, and , in the case of daughters of Native fathers, girls who have not completed the age of thirteen years: In other cases it means unmarried children who have not completed the age of eighteen years:

“Incestuous adultery”. -(6) “incestuous adultery” means adultery committed by a husband with a woman with whom, if his wife were dead, he could not lawfully contract marriage by reason of her being within the prohibited degrees of consanguinity (whether natural or legal) or affinity:

“Bigamy with adultery”.-(7) “bigamy with adultery” means adultery with the same woman with whom the bigamy was committed:”

“Marriage with another woman”.-(8) “marriage with another woman” means marriage of any person, being married, to any other person, during the life of the former wife, whether the second marriage shall have taken place within [India] or elsewhere:

“Desertion”-(9) “desertion” implies abandonment against the wish of the person charging it: and

“Property”-(10) “property” includes in the case of the wife any property to which she is entitled for an estate in reminder or reversion or as trustee, executrix or administratrix; and the date of the death of the testator or interstate shall be deemed to be the time at which any such wife becomes entitled as executrix or administratrix.

Chapter II – Jurisdiction

Section 4. Matrimonial jurisdiction of High Courts to be exercised subject to Act Exception.

The jurisdiction now exercised by the High Courts in respect of divorce a mensa et toro, and in all other causes, suits and matters matrimonial, shall be exercised by such Courts and by the District Courts subject to the provisions in this Act contained, and not otherwise: except so far as relates to the granting of marriage-licenses, which may be granted as if this Act had not been passed.

Section 5. Enforcement of decrees or orders made heretofore by Supreme or High Court.

Any decree or order of the late Supreme Court of judicature at Calcutta, Madras or Bombay sitting on the ecclesiastical side, or of any of the said High Courts sitting in the exercise of their matrimonial jurisdiction, respectively, in any cause or matter matrimonial, may be enforced and dealt with by the said High Courts, respectively , as hereinafter mentioned, in like manner as if such decree or order had been originally made under this Act by the Court so enforcing or dealing with the same.

Section 6. Pending suits

All suits and proceedings in causes and matter matrimonial, which when this Act comes into operation are pending in any High Court, shall be dealt with and decided by such Court, so far as may be, as if they had been originally instituted therein under this Act.

Section 7. Court to act on principles of English Divorce Court.

Subject to the provisions contained in this Act, the High Courts and District Courts shall, in all suits and proceedings hereunder, act and give relief on principles and rules which, in the opinion of the said Courts, are as nearly as may be conformable to the principles and rules on which the Court for Divorce and Matrimonial Causes in England for the time being acts and gives relief:

Provided that nothing in this section shall deprive the said Courts of jurisdiction in a case where the parties to a marriage professed the Christian religion at the time of the occurrence of the facts on which the claim to relief is founded.

Section 8. Extraordinary jurisdiction of High Court.

The High Court may, whenever it thinks fit, remove and try and determine as a Court of original jurisdiction any suit or proceeding instituted under this Act in the Court of any District Judge within the limits of its jurisdiction under this Act.

Power to transfer suits.-The High Court may also withdraw any such suit or proceeding, and transfer it for trial or disposal to the Court of any other such District Judge.

Section 9. Reference to High Court.

When any question of law or usage having the force of law arises at any point in the proceedings previous to the hearing of any suit, or in the execution of the decree therein or order thereon, the Court may, either of its won motion or on the application any of the parties, draw up a statement of the case and refer it, with the Court’s own opinion thereon, to the decision of the High Court.

If the question has arisen previous to or in the hearing, the District Court may either stay such proceedings, or proceed in the case pending such reference, and pass a decree contingent upon the opinion of the High Court upon it.

If a decree or order has been made, its execution shall be stayed until the receipt of the order or the High Court upon such reference.

Chapter III – Dissolution of Marriage

Section 10. When husband may petition for dissolution

Any husband may present a petition to the District Court or to the High Court, praying that his marriage may be dissolved on the ground that his wife has, since the solemnization thereof, been guilty of adultery.

When wife may petition for dissolution.-Any wife may present a petition to the District Court or to the High Court, praying that his marriage may be dissolved on the ground that, since the solemnization thereof, her husband has exchanged his profession of Christianity for the profession of some other religion, and gone through a form of marriage with another woman;

Or has been guilty of incestuous adultery,

Or of bigamy with adultery,

Or of marriage with another woman with adultery,

Or of rape, sodomy or bestiality,

Or of adultery coupled with such cruelty as without adultery would have entitled her to a divorce a mensa et toro,

Or of adultery coupled with desertion, without reasonable execuse, for two years or upwards.

Contents of petition. -Every such petition shall state, as distinctly as the nature of the case permits, the facts on which the claim to have such marriage dissolved is founded.10. When husband may petition for dissolution – Any husband may present a petition to the District Court or to the High Court, praying that his marriage may be dissolved on the ground that his wife has, since the solemnization thereof, been guilty of adultery.

When wife may petition for dissolution.-Any wife may present a petition to the District Court or to the High Court, praying that his marriage may be dissolved on the ground that, since the solemnization thereof, her husband has exchanged his profession of Christianity for the profession of some other religion, and gone through a form of marriage with another woman;

Or has been guilty of incestuous adultery,

Or of bigamy with adultery,

Or of marriage with another woman with adultery,

Or of rape, sodomy or bestiality,

Or of adultery coupled with such cruelty as without adultery would have

entitled her to a divorce a mensa et toro,

Or of adultery coupled with desertion, without reasonable execuse, for two years or upwards.

Contents of petition. -Every such petition shall state, as distinctly as the nature of the case permits, the facts on which the claim to have such marriage dissolved is founded.

Section 11. Adultery to be co-respondent.

union any such petition presented by a husband, the petitioner shall make the alleged adulterer a correspondent to the said petition, unless he is excused from so doing on one of the following grounds, to be allowed by the Court:-

(1) That the respondent is leading the life of prostitute, and the petitioner knows of no person with whom the adultery has been committed;

(2) That the name of the alleged adulterer is unknown to the petitioner, although he has made due efforts to discover it;

(3) That the alleged adulterer is dead.

Section 12. Court to be satisfied of absence of collusion.

Upon any such petition for the dissolution of a marriage, the Court shall satisfy itself, so far as it reasonably can, not only as to the facts alleged, but also whether or not the petitioner has been in any manner accessory to, or conniving at, the going through of the said form of marriage, or the adultery, or has condoned the same, and shall also enquire into any countercharge which may be made against the petitioner.

Section 13. Dismissal of petition.

In case the Court, on the evidence in relation to any such petition, is satisfied that the alleged adultery has been committed, or finds that the petitioner has, during the marriage, been accessory to, or conniving at, the going through of the said form of marriage, been accessory to, or conniving at, the going through of the said form of marriage, or the adultery of the other party to the marriage, or has condoned the adultery complained of, or that the petition is presented or prosecute in collusion with either of the respondents, then, in and any of the said cases the Court shall dismiss the petition.

When a petition is dismissed by a District Court under this section, the petitioner, may nevertheless, present a similar petition to the High Court.

Section 14. power to Court to pronounce decree for dissolving marriage.

In case the Court is satisfied on the evidence that the case of the petitioner has been proved, and does not fine that the petitioner has been in any manner accessory to, or conniving at, the going through of the said form of marriage, or the adultery of the other party to the marriage, or has condoned the adultery complained of,

Or that the petition is presented or prosecuted in collusion with either of the respondents,

The Court shall pronounce a decree declaring such marriage to be dissolved in the manner and subject to all the provisions and limitations in sections 16 and 17 made and declared:

Provided that the Court shall not be bound to pronounce such decree if it finds that the petitioner has, during the marriage, been guilty of adultery,

Or if the petitioner has, in the opinion of the Court, been guilty of unreasonable delay in presenting or prosecuting such petition,

Or of cruelty towards the other party to the marriage,

Or of having deserted willfully separated himself or herself from the other party before the adultery complained of, and without reasonable excuse,

Or of such willful neglect or misconduct of or towards the other party as had conduced to the adultery.

Condonation.- No adultery shall be deemed to have been condoned within the meaning of this Act unless where conjugal cohabitation has been resumed or continued.

Section 15. Relief in case of opposition on certain grounds.

In any suit instituted for dissolution of marriage, if the respondent opposes the relief sought on the ground, in case of such a suit instituted by a husband, of his adultery, cruelty, or desertion without reasonable excuse, or, in case of such a suit instituted by a wife, on the ground of her adultery and cruelty, the Court may in such suit give to the respondent, on his or her application, the same relief to which he or she would have been entitled in case he or she had presented a petition seeking such relief, and the respondent shall be competent to give evidence of or relating in case he or she had presented a petition seeking such relief, and the respondent shall be competent to give evidence of or relating to such cruelty or desertion.

Section 16. Decrees for dissolution to be nisi.

Every decree for dissolution of marriage made by a High Court not being a confirmation of a decree of a District Court, shall, in the first instance, be a decree nisi, not to be made absolute till after the expiration of such time, not less than six months from the pronouncing thereof, as the High Court, by general or special order from time to time, directs.

Collusion. – During that period any person shall be at liberty, in such manner as the High Court by general or special order from time to time direct, to show cause why the said decree should not be made absolute by reason of the same having been obtained by collusion or by reason of material facts not being brought before the Court.

On cause being so shown, the Court shall deal with the case by making the decree absolute, or by reversing the decree nisi, or by requiring further inquiry, or otherwise as justice may demand.

The High Court may order the cost of Counsel and witnesses and otherwise arising from such cause being shown, to be paid by the parties or such one or more of them as it thinks fit, including a wife if she have separate property.

Whenever a decree nisi has been made, and the petitioner fails, within a reasonable time, to move to have such decree made absolute, the High Court may dismiss the suit.

Section 17. Confirmation of decree for dissolution by District Judge.

Every decree for dissolution of a marriage made by a District Judge shall be subject to confirmation by the High Court.

Cases for confirmation of a decree for dissolution of marriage shall be heard (where the number of the Judges of the High Court is three or upwards) by a Court composed of three such Judges, and in case of difference, the opinion of the majority shall prevail, or (where the number of the Judges of the High Court is two) by a Court composed of such two Judges, and in case of difference, the opinion of the Senior Judges shall prevail.

The High Court, if it think further enquiry or additional evidence to be necessary, may direct such enquiry to be made, or such evidence to be taken.

The result of such enquiry and the additional evidence shall be certified to the High Court by the district Judge, and the High Court shall thereupon make an order confirming the decree for dissolution of marriage, or such other order as to the Court seems fit:

Provided that no decree shall be confirmed under this section till after the expiration of such time, not less than six months from the pronouncing thereof, as the High Court by general of special order from time to time directs.

During the progress of the suit in the Court of the District Judge, any person suspecting that any parties to the suit are or have been acting collusion for the purposes of obtaining a divorce, shall be at liberty, in such manner as the High Court by general or special order from time to tome directs, to apply to the High Court to remove the suit under section 8, and the High Court shall thereupon, if it thinks fit, remove such suit and try and determine the same as a Court of original jurisdiction, and the provisions contained in section 16 shall apply to every suit so removed: or it may direct the District Judge to take such steps in respect of the alleged collusion as may be necessary, to enable him to make a decree in accordance with the justice of the case.

Section 17A. Appointment of officer to exercise duties of King’s Proctor.

The Government of the State within which any High Court exercises jurisdiction, may appoint an officer who shall, within the jurisdiction of the High Court in that State, have the like right of showing cause why a decree for the dissolution of a marriage should not be made absolute or should not be confirmed, as the case may be, as is exercisable in England by the King’s Proctor; and the said Government may make rules regulating the manner in which the right shall be exercised and all matters incidental to or consequential or any exercise of the right.

Chapter IV – Delinquent Juveniles

Section 18. Petition for decree of nullity.

Any husband or wife may present a petitioner to the District Court or to the High Court, praying that his or her marriage may be declared null and void.

Section 19. Grounds of decree.

Such decree may be made on any of the following grounds:-

(1) That the respondent was impotent at the time of the marriage and at the time of the institution of the suit;

(2) That the parties are within the prohibited degrees of consanguinity (whether natural or legal) or affinity;

(3) That either party was a lunatic or idiot at the time of the marriage;

(4) That the former husband or wife of either party was living at the time of the marriage, and the marriage with such former husband or wife was then in force.

Nothing in this section shall effect the jurisdiction of the High Court to make decrees of nullity of marriage on the ground that the consent of either party was obtained by force or fraud.

Section 20. Confirmation of District Judge’s decree

Every deccree of nullify of marriage made by a District Judge shall be subject to confirmation by the High Court, and the provisions of section 17, clauses 11,2,3,and 4, shall, mutatis mutandis apply to such decrees.

Section 21. Children of annulled marriage.

Where a marriage is annulled on the ground that a former husband or wife was living, and it is adjudged that the subsequent marriage was contracted in good faith and with the full belief of the parties that the former husband or wife was dead, or when a marriage is annulled on the ground of insanity, children begotten before the decree is made shall be specified in the decree, and shall be entitled to succeed, in the same manner as legitimate children, to the estate of the parent who at the time of the marriage was competent to contract.

Chapter V – Judicial Separation

Section 22. Bar to decree for divorce a mensa et toro: but judicial separation obtainable by husband or wife.

No decree shall hereafter be made for a divorce a mensa et toro, but the husband or wife may obtain a decree of judicial separation, on the ground of adultery, or cruelty, or desertion without reasonable excuse for two years or upwards, and such decree shall have the effect of divorce a mensa et toro under the existing law, and such other legal effect as hereinafter mentioned.

Section 23. Application for separation made by petition.

Application for judicial separation on any one of the grounds aforesaid, may be made by either husband or wife petition to the District Court or the High Court; and the Court, on being satisfied of the truth of the statements made in such petition, and that there is no legal ground why the application should not be granted, may decree judicial separation accordingly.

Section 24. Separated wife deemed spinster with respect to after-acquired property.

In every case of judicial separation under this Act, the wife shall, form the date of the sentence, and whilst the separation continues, be considered as unmarried with respect to property of every description which she may acquire, or which may come to or devolve upon her.

Such property may be disposed of by her in all respects as an unmarried woman, and on her decease the same shall, in case she dies interstate, go as the same would have gone if her husband had been then dead:

Provided that, if any such wife again cohabits with her husband, all such property as she may be entitled to when such cohabitation takes place shall be held to her separate use, subject, however, to any agreement in writing made between herself and her husband whilst separate.

Section 25. Separated wife deemed spinster for purposes of contract and suing

In every case of judicial separation under this Act, the wife shall, whilst so separated, be considered as an unmarried woman for the purposes of contract, and wrongs and injuries, and suing and being sued in and civil proceeding; and her husband shall not be liable in respect of any contract, act or costs entered into, done, omitted or incurred by her during the separation:

Provided that where, upon any such judicial separation, alimony has been decreed or ordered to be paid to the wife, and the same is not duly paid by the husband, he shall be liable for necessaries supplied for her use:

Provided also that nothing shall prevent the wife from joining, at any time during such separation, in the exercise of any joint power given to herself and her husband.

Section 26. Decree of separation obtained during absence of husband or wife may be reversed.

Any husband or wife, upon the application of whose wife or husband, as the case may be, a decree of judicial separation has been pronounced, may, at any time thereafter, present a petition to the Court by which the decree was pronounced, praying for a reversal of such decree, on the ground that it was obtained in his or her absence, and that there was reasonable excuse for the alleged desertion, where desertion was the ground of such decree.

The Court may, in being satisfied of the truth of the allegations of such petition, reverse the decree accordingly; but such reversal shall not prejudice or affect the rights or remedies which any other person would have had, in case it had not been decreed, in respect of any debts, contracts, or acts of the wife incurred, entered into, or done between the times of the sentence of separation and of the reversal thereof.

Chapter VI – Protection-Orders

Section 27. Deserted wife may apply to court for protection.

Any wife to whom section 4 of the Indian Succession Act, 1865, (10 of 1865) does not apply, any, when deserted by her husband, present a petition to the District Court or the High Court, at any time after such desertion, for an order to protect any property which she may have acquired or may acquire, any property of which she may have become possessed or may become possessed after such desertion, against her husband or his creditors, or any person claiming under him.

Section 28. Court may grant protection-order.

The Court, if satisfied of the fact of such desertion, and that the same was without reasonable excuse, and that the wife is maintaining herself by her own industry or property, may make and give to the wife an order protecting her earnings and other property from her husband and all creditors and persons claiming under him. Every such order shall state the time at which the desertion commenced, and shall, as regards all persons dealing with the wife in reliance thereon, be conclusive as to such time..

Section 29. Discharge or variation of orders.

The husband or any creditor of, or person claiming under him, may apply to the Court by which such order was made for the discharge or variation thereof, and the Court, if the desertion has ceased, or if for any other reason it thinks fit so to do, may discharge or vary the order accordingly.

Section 30. Liability of husband seizing wife’s property after notice or order.

If the husband, or any creditor of, or person claiming under the husband, seizes or continues to hold any property of the wife after notice of any such order, he shall be liable, at the suit of the wife (which she is hereby empowered to bring), to return or deliver to her the specific property, and also to per her a sum equal to double its value.

Section 31. Wife’s legal position during continuance of order.

So long as any such order of protection remains in force the wife shall be and be deemed to have been, during such desertion of her, in the like position in all respects, with regard to property and contracts and suing and being sued, as she would be under this Act if she obtained a decree of judicial separation.

Chapter VII – Restitution of Conjugal Rights

Section 32. Petition for restitution of conjugal rights.

When either the husband or the wife has, without reasonable excuse, withdrawn from the society of the other, either wife, or husband may apply, by petition to the District Court or the High Court for restitution of conjugal rights, and the Court, on being satisfied of the truth of the statements made in such petition, and that there is no legal ground why the application should not be granted, may decree restitution of conjugal rights accordingly.

Section 33. Answer to petition.

Nothing shall be pleaded in answer to a petition For restitution of conjugal rights, which would not be ground for a suit for judicial separation or for a decree of nullity of marriage.

Chapter VIII – Damages and Costs

Section 34. Husband may claim damages from adulterer.

Any husband may, either in a petition for dissolution of marriage or for judicial separation only, claim damages from any person on the ground of his having committed adultery with the wife of such petitioner.

Such petition shall be served on the alleged adulterer and the wife, unless the Court dispenses with such service, or directs some other service to be substituted.

The damages to be recovered on any such petition shall be ascertained by the said Court, although the respondents or either of them may not appear.

After the decision has been given, the Court may direct in what manner such damages shall be paid or applied.

Section 35. Power to order adulterer to pay costs.

Whenever in any petition presented by a husband the alleged adulterer has been made a co- respondent, and the adultery has been established the Court may order the correspondent to pay the whole or any part of the costs of the proceedings.

Provided that the co-respondent shall not be ordered to pay the petitioners costs-

(1) If the respondent was, at the time of the adultery, living apart from her husband and leading the life of a prostitute, or

(2) If the co- respondent had not, at the time of the adultery, reason to believe the respondent to be a married woman.

Power to order litigious intervener to pay costs.-Whenever any application is made under section 17, the Court, if it thinks that the applicant had no grounds or no sufficient grounds for intervening, may order him to pay the whole or any part of the costs occasioned by the application.

Chapter IX – Alimony

Section 36. Alimony pendente lite.

In any suit under this Act, whether it be instituted by a husband or a wife, and whether or not she has obtained an order of protection the wife may present a petition for alimony pending the suit.

Such petition shall be served on the husband; and the Court, on being satisfied of the truth of the statements therein contained, may make such order on the husband for payment to the wife of alimony pending the suit as it may deem just:

Provided that alimony pending the suit shall in no case exceed one-fifth of the husband’s average net income for the three years next preceding the date of the order, and shall continue, in case of a decree for dissolution of marriage or of nullity of marriage, until the decree is made absolute or is confirmed, as the case may be.

Section 37. Power to order permanent alimony.

The High Court may, if it thinks fit, on any decree absolute declaring a marriage to be dissolved, or on any decree of judicial separation obtained by the wife, and the District Judge may, if he thinks fit, on the confirmation of any decree or his declaring a marriage to be dissolved, or on any decree of judicial separation obtained by the wife,

Order that the husband shall, to the satisfaction of the Court, secure to the wife such gross sum of money, or such annual sum of money for any term not exceeding her own life, as, having regard to her fortune (if any), to the ability of the husband, and to the conduct of the parties, it thinks reasonable; and for that purpose may cause a proper instrument to be executed by all necessary.

Power to order monthly or weekly payments.-In every such case the Court may make an order on the husband for payment to the wife of such monthly or weekly sums for her maintenance and support as the Court may think reasonable:

Provided that if the husband afterwards from any cause becomes unable to make such payments, it shall be lawful for the Court to discharge or modify the order, or temporarily to suspend the same as to the whole or any part of the money so ordered to be paid, and again to revive the same order wholly or in part as to the Court seems fit.

Section 38. Court may direct payment of alimony to wife or to her trustee.

In all cases in which the Court makes any decree or order for alimony, it may direct the same to be paid either to the wife herself, or to any trustee on her behalf to be approved by the Court, and may impose any terms or restrictions which to the Court seem expedient, and may from time to time appoint a new trustee, if it appears to the Court expedient so to do.

Chapter X – Settlements

Section 39. Power to order settlement of wife’s property for benefit to husband and children.

Whenever the Court pronounces a decree of dissolution of marriage or Judicial separation for adultery of the wife, if it is made to appear to the Court that the wife is entitled to any property, the Court may, if it thinks fit, order such settlement as it thinks reasonable to be made of such property or any part thereof, for the benefit of the husband, or of the children of the marriage, or of both.

Any instrument executed pursuant to any order of the Court at the time of or after the pronouncing of a decree of dissolution of marriage or judicial separation, shall be deemed valid notwithstanding the existence of the disability of coverture at the time of the execution thereof:

Settlement of damages. – The court may direct that the whole or any part of the damages recovered under section 34 shall be settled for the benefit of the children of the marriage, or as a provision for the maintenance of the wife.

Section 40. Inquiry into existence of ante-nuptial or post-nuptial settlements.

The High Court, after a decree absolute for dissolution of marriage, or a decree of nullity of marriage, and the District Court, after its decree for dissolution of marriage or of nullity of marriage has been confirmed,

may inquire into the existence of ante-nuptial or post-nuptial settlements made on the parties whose marriage is the subject of the decree, and may make such orders, with reference to the application of the whole or a portion of the property settled, whether for the benefit of the husband or the wife, or of the children (if any) of the marriage, or of both children and parents, as to the Court seems fit:

Provided that the Court shall not make any order for the benefit of the parents or either of them at the expense of the children.

Chapter XI – Custody of Children

Section 41. Power to make orders as to custody of children in suit for separation.

In any suit for obtaining a judicial separation the Court may from time to time, before making its decree, make such interim orders, and may make such provision in the decree, as it deems proper with respect to the custody, maintenance and education of the minor children, the marriage of whose parents is the subject of such suit, and may, if it thinks fit, direct proceedings to be taken for placing such children under the protection of the said Court.

Section 42. Power to make such orders after decree.

The Court, after a decree of judicial separation, may upon application (by petition) for this purposes make, from time to time, all such orders and provisions; with respect to the custody, maintenance and education of the minor children, the marriage of whose parents is the subject of the decree, or for placing such children under the protection of the said Court, as might have been made by such decree or by interim orders in case the proceedings for obtaining such decree were still pending.

Section 43. Power to make orders as to custody of children in suits for dissolution or nullity.

In any suit for obtaining a dissolution or marriage or a decree of nullity of marriage instituted in, or removed to, a High Court, the Court may from time to time, before making its decree absolute or its decree (as the case may be), make such interim orders, and may make such provision in the decree absolute or decree, and in any such suit instituted in a District Court may from time to time, before its decree is confirmed, make such interim orders, and may make such provision on such confirmation.

as the High Court of District Court (as the case may be ) deems proper with respect to the custody, maintenance and education of the minor children, the marriage of whose parents is the subject of the suit,

and may, if it thinks fit, direct proceedings to be taken for placing such children under the protection of the Court.

Section 44. Power to make such orders after decree or confirmation.

The High Court after a decree absolute for dissolution of marriage or a decree of nullity of marriage,

and the District Court after a decree for dissolution of marriage or of nullity of marriage has been confirmed,

may, upon application by petition for the purpose, make from time to time all such orders and provisions, with respect to the custody, maintenance and education of the minor children, the marriage of whose parents was the subject of the decree, or for placing such children under the protection of the said Court, as might have been made by such decree absolute or decree (as the case may be), or by such interim orders as aforesaid.

Chapter XII – Procedure

Section 45. – Code of Civil Procedure to apply.

Subject to the provisions herein contained all proceedings under this Act between party and party shall be regulated by the Code of Civil Procedure.

Section 46. Forms of petitions and statements.

The forms set forth in the Schedule to this Act, with such variation as the circumstances of each case require, may be used for the respective purposes mentioned in such Schedule.

Section 47. Petition to state absence of collusion.

Every petition under this Act for a decree of dissolution of marriage, or of nullity of marriage, or of judicial separation shall state that there is not any collusion or connivance between the petitioner and the other party to the marriage.

Statement to be verified. -The statements contained in every petition under this Act shall be verified by the petitioner or some other competent person in manner required by law for the verification of plaints, and may at the hearing be referred to as evidence.

Section 48. Suits on behalf of lunatics.

When the husband or wife is a lunatic or idiot, and suit under this Act (other than a suit for restitution of conjugal rights) may be brought on his or her behalf by the committee or other person entitled to his or her custody.

Section 49. Suits by minors.

Where the petitioner is a minor, he or she shall sue by his or her next friend to be approved by the Court; and no petition presented by a minor under this Act shall be filed until the next friend has undertaken in writing to be answerable for costs.

Such undertaking shall be filed in Court, and the next friend shall thereupon be liable in the same manner and to the same extent as if he were a plaintiff in an ordinary suit.

Section 50. Service of petition.

Every petition under this Act shall be served on the party to be affected thereby, either within or without [India], in such manner as the High Court by general or special order from time to time directs:

Provided that the Court may dispense with such service altogether in case it seems necessary or expedient so to do.

Section 51. Mode of taking evidence

The witnesses in all proceedings before the Court, where their attendance can be had, shall be examined orally, and any party may offer himself or herself as a witness, and shall be examined, and may be cross-examined and re-examined, like any other witness:

Provided that the parties shall be at liberty to verify their respective cases in whole or in part by affidavit, but so that the deponent in every such affidavit shall, on the application of the opposite party, or by direction of the Court, be subject to be cross-examined by or on behalf of the opposite party orally, and after such cross-examination may be re-examined orally as aforesaid by or on behalf of the party by whom such affidavit was filed.

Section 52. Competence of husband and wife to give evidence as to cruelty or desertion.

On any petition presented by a wife, praying that her marriage may be dissolved by reason of her husband having been guilty of adultery coupled with cruelty, or of adultery coupled with desertion without reasonable excuse, the husband and wife respectively shall be competent and compellable to give evidence of or relating to such cruelty or desertion.

Provided that the parties shall be at liberty to verify their respective cases in whole or in part by affidavit, but so that the deponent in every such affidavit shall, on the application of the opposite party, or by direction of the Court, be subject to be cross-examined by or on behalf of the opposite party orally, and after such cross-examination may be re-examined orally as aforesaid by or on behalf of the party by whom such affidavit was filed.

Section 53. Power to close doors.

The whole or any party of any proceeding under this Act may be heard, if the Court thinks fit, with closed doors.

Section 54. Power to adjourn.

The Court may, from time to time, adjourn the hearing of any petition under this Act, and may require further evidence thereon if it sees fit so to do.

Provided that the parties shall be at liberty to verify their respective cases in whole or in part by affidavit, but so that the deponent in every such affidavit shall, on the application of the opposite party, or by direction of the Court, be subject to be cross-examined by or on behalf of the opposite party orally, and after such cross-examination may be re-examined orally as aforesaid by or on behalf of the party by whom such affidavit was filed.

Section 55. Enforcement of, and appeal from, orders and decrees.

All decrees and orders made by the Court in any suit or proceeding under this Act shall be enforced and may be appealed from, in the like manner as the decrees and orders of the Court made in the exercise of its original civil jurisdiction are enforced and may be appealed from, under the laws, rules and orders for the time being in force:

Provided that there shall be no appeal from a decree of a District Judge for dissolution of marriage or of nullity of marriage: nor from the order of the High Court confirming or refusing to confirm such decree:

No appeal as to costs. -Provided also that there shall be no appeal on the subject of costs only.

Section 56. Appeal to the Supreme Court.

Any person may appeal to [the Supreme Court from any decree (other than a decree nisi) or order under this Act of a High Court made on appeal or otherwise,

and from any decree (other than a decree nisi) or order made in the exercise of original jurisdiction by Judge of a High Court or of any Division Court from which an appeal shall not lie to the High Court,

when the High Court declares that the case is a fit one for appeal to [the Supreme Court.

Chapter XIII – Re-marriage

Section 57. Liberty to parties to marry again.

When six months after the date of an order of a High Court confirming the decree for a dissolution of marriage made by a District Judge have expired,

or when six months after the date of any decree of a High Court dissolving a marriage have expired, and no appeal has been presented against such decree to the High Court in its appellate jurisdiction,

or when any such appeal has been dismissed,

or when in the result of any such appeal any marriage is declared to be dissolved,

but no sooner, it shall be lawful for the respect parties to the marriage to marry again, as if the prior marriage had been dissolved by death:

Provided that no appeal to [Supreme Court] has been presented against any such order or decree.

When such appeal has been dismissed, or when in the result thereof the marriage is declared to be dissolved, but not sooner, it shall be lawful for the respective parties to the marriage to marry again as if the prior marriage had been dissolved by death.

Section 58. English clergyman not compelled to solemnize marriage of persons divorced for adultery.

No clergyman in Holy Orders of the Church of England shall be compelled to solemnize the marriage of any person whose former marriage has been dissolved on the ground of his or her adultery, or shall be liable to any suit, penalty or censure for solemnizing or refusing to solemnize the marriage of any such person.

Section 59. English Minister refusing to perform ceremony to permit use of his Church.

When any Minister of any Church or Chapel of the said Church refuses to perform such marriage-service between any persons who but for such refusal would be entitled to have the same service performed in such Church or Chapel, such Minister shall permit any other Minister in Holy Orders of the said Church, entitled to officiate within the diocese in which such Church or Chapel is situate, to perform such marriage-service in such Church or Chapel.

Chapter XIV – Miscellaneous

Section 60. Decree for separation or protection-order valid as to persons dealing with wife before reversal.

Every decree for judicial separation or order to protect property, obtained by a wife under this Act shall, until reversed or discharged, be deemed valid, so far as necessary, for the protection of any person dealing with the wife.

No reversal, discharge or variation of such decree or order shall affect any rights or remedies which any person would otherwise have had in respect of any contracts or acts of the wife entered into or done between the dates of such decree or order, and of the reversal, discharge or variation thereof.

Indemnity of persons making payment to wife without notice of reversal of decree or protection- order. -All persons who in reliance on any such decree or order make any payment to, or permit any transfer or act to be made or done by, the wife who has obtained the same shall,

notwithstanding such decree or order may then have been reversed, discharged or varied, or the separation of the wife from her husband may have ceased, or at some time since the making of the decree or order been discontinued, be protected and indemnified as if, at the time of such payment, transfer or other act, such decree or order were valid and still subsisting without variation, and the separation had not ceased or been discontinued.

Unless, at the time of payment, transfer or other act, such person had notice of the reversal, discharge or variation of the decree or order or of the cessation or discontinuance of the separation.

Section 61. Bar of suit for criminal conversation.

After this Act comes into operation, no person competent to present a petition under section 2 and 10 shall maintain a suit for criminal conversation with his wife.

Section 62. Power to make rules.

The High Court shall make such rules under this Act as it may from time to time consider expedient, and may from time to time alter and add to the same:

Provided that such rules, alterations and additions are consistent with the provisions of this Act and the Code of Civil Procedure.

All such rules, alterations and additions shall be published in the Official Gazette.

National Green Tribunal Act

Section 1. Short title and commencement

(1) This Act may be called the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010.

(2) It shall come into force on such date as the Central Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette, appoint.

Section 2. Definitions

(1) In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,-

(a) “accident” means an accident involving a fortuitous or sudden or unintended occurrence while handling any hazardous substance or equipment, or plant, or vehicle resulting in continuous or intermittent or repeated exposure to death, of, or, injury to, any person or damage to any property or environment but does not include an accident by reason only of war or civil disturbance;

(b) ” Chairperson” means the Chairperson of the National Green Tribunal;

(c) “environment” include water, air and land and the inter-relationship, which exists among and between water, air and land and human beings, other living creatures, plants, micro-organism and property;

(d) “Expert Member” means a member of the Tribunal who, is appointed as such, and holds qualifications specified in sub-section (2) of section 5, and, is not a Judicial Member;

(e) “handling”, in relation to any hazardous substance, means the manufacture, processing, treatment, package, storage, trasnpiration, use, collection, destruction, conversion, offering for sale, transfer or the like of such hazardous substance;

(f) “hazardous substance” means any substance or preparation which is defined as hazardous substance in the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, and exceeding such quantity as specified or may be specified by the Central Government under the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991; (29 of 1986, 6 of 1991)

(g) “injury” includes permanent, partial or total disablement or sickness resulting out of an accident;

(h) “Judicial Member” means a member of the Tribunal who is qualified to be appointed as such under sub-section (1) of section 5 and includes the Chairperson;

(i) “notification” means a notification published in the Official Gazette;

(j) “person” includes—

(i) an individual,

(ii) a Hindu undivided family,

(iii) a company,

(iv) a firm,

(v) an association of persons or a body of individuals, whether incorporated or not,

(vi) trustee of a trust,

(vii) a local authority, and

(viii) every artificial juridical person, not falling within any of the proceeding sub-clauses;

(k) “prescribed” means prescribed by rules made under this Act;

(l) “Schedule” means Schedules I, II and III appended to this Act;

(m) “substantial question relating to environment” shall include an instance where,—

(i) there is a direct violation of a specific statutory environment obligation by a person by which,—

(A) the community at large other than an individual or group of individuals is affected or likely to be affected by the environmental consequences; or

(B) the gravity of damage to the environment or property is substantial; or

(C) the damage to public health is broadly measurable;

(ii) the environmental consequences relate to a specific activity or a point source of pollution;

(n) “Tribunal” means the National Green Tribunal established under section 3;

(o) “workman” has the meaning assigned to it in the Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923. ( 8 of 1923).

(2) The words and expressions used in this Act but not defined herein and defined in the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977, the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980, the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991, and the Biological Diversity Act, 2002 and other Acts relating to environment shall have the meaning, respectively, assigned to them in those Acts.

Chapter II – Establishment of the Tribunal

Section 3. Establishment of Tribunal

The Central Government shall, by notification, established, with effect from such date as may be specified therein, a Tribunal to be known as the National Green Tribunal to exercise the jurisdiction, powers and authority conferred on such Tribunal by or under this Act.

Section 4. Composition of Tribunal

(1) The Tribunal shall consist of —-

(a) a full time Chairperson;

(b) not less than ten but subject to maximum of twenty full time Judicial Members as the Central Government may, from time to time, notify;

(c) not less than ten but subject to maximum of twenty full time Expert Members, as the Central Government may, from time to time, notify.

(2) The Chairperson of the Tribunal may, if considered necessary, invite any one or more person having specialised knowledge and experience in a particular case before the Tribunal to assist the Tribunal in that case.

(3) The Central Government may, by notification, specify the ordinary place or places of sitting of the Tribunal, and the territorial jurisdiction falling under each such place of sitting.

(4) The Central Government may, in consultation with the Chairperson of the Tribunal make rules regulating generally the practices and procedure of the Tribunal including—

(a) the rules as to the persons who shall be entitled to appear before the Tribunal;

(b) the rules as to the procedure for hearing applications and appeals and other matters [including the circuit procedure for hearing at a place other than the ordinary place of its sitting falling within the jurisdiction referred to in sub-section (3)], pertaining to the application and appeals;

(c) the minimum number of Members who shall hear the application and appeals in respect of any class or classes of applications and appeals;

Provided that the number of Expert Members shall, in hearing an application or appeal, be equal to the number of Judicial Members hearing such application or appeal;

(d) rules relating to transfer of cases by the Chairperson from one place of sitting (including the ordinary place of sitting) to other place of sitting.

Section 5. Qualifications for appointment of Chairperson, Judicial Member and Expert Member

(1) A person shall not be qualified for appointment as the Chairperson or Judicial Member of the Tribunal unless he is, or has been, a Judge of the Supreme Court of India or Chief Justice of a High Court;

Provided that a person who is or has been a Judge of the High Court shall also be qualified to be appointed as a Judicial Member.

(2) A person shall not be qualified for appointment as an Expert Member, unless he,—

(a) has a degree in Master of Science (in physical sciences or life sciences) with a Doctorate degree or Master of Engineering or Master of Technology and has an experience of fifteen years in the relevant field including five years practical experience in the field of environment and forests (including pollution control, hazardous substance management, environment impact assessment, climate change management, biological diversity management and forest conservation) in a reputed National level institution; or

(b) has administrative experience of fifteen years including experience of five years in dealing with environmental matters in the Central or a State Government or in a reputed National or State level institution.

(3) The Chairperson, Judicial Member, and Expert Member of the Tribunal shall not hold any other office during their tenure as such.

(4) The Chairperson and other Judicial and Expert Members shall not, for a period of two years from the date on which cease to hold office, accept any employment in, or connected with the management or administration of, any person who has been a party to a proceeding before the Tribunal under this Act;

Provided that nothing contained in this section shall apply to any employment under the Central Government or a State Government or local authority or in any statutory authority or any corporation established by or under any Central, State or Provincial Act or a Government compnay as defined in section 617 of the Companies Act, 1956. (1 of 1956).

Section 6. Appointment of Chairperson, Judicial Member and Expert Member

(1) Subject to the provisions of section 5, the Chairperson, Judicial Members and Expert Members of the Tribunal shall be appointment by the Central Government.

(2) The Chairperson shall be appointed by the Central Government in consultation with the Chief Justice of India.

(3) The Judicial Members and Expert Members of the Tribunal shall be appointed on the recommendations of such Selection Committee and in such manner as may be prescribed.

Section 7. Term of office and other condition of service of Chairperson, Judicial Member and Expert Member

The Chairperson, Judicial Member and Expert Member of the Tribunal shall hold office as such for a term of five years from the date on which they enter upon their office, but shall not be eligible for re-appointment.

Provided that in case a person, who is or has been a Judge of the Supreme Court, has been appointed as Chairperson or Judicial Member of the Tribunal, he shall not hold office after he has attained the age of seventy years.

Provided further that in case a person, who is or has been the Chief Justice of a High Court, has been appointed as Chairperson or Judicial Member of the Tribunal, he shall not hold office after he has attained the age of sixty-seven years;

Provided also that in case a person, who is or has been a Judge of a High Court, has been appointed as Judicial Member of the Tribunal, he shall not hold office after he has attained the age of sixty-seven years;

Provided also that no Expert Member shall hold office after he has attained the age of sixty-five years;

Section 8. Resignation

The Chairperson, Judicial Member and Expert Member of the Tribunal may, by notice in writing under their hand addressed to the Central Government, resign their office.

Section 9. Salaries, allowances and other terms and conditions of service

The salaries and a allowances payable to, and the other terms and condition of service (including pension, gratuity and other retirement benefits) of, the Chairperson, Judicial Member and Expert Member of the Tribunal shall be such as may be prescribed;

Provided that neither the salary and allowances not the other terms and conditions of service of the Chairperson, Judicial Member and Expert Member shall be varied to their disadvantage after their appointment.

Section 10. Removal and suspension of Chairperson, Judicial Member and Expert Member

(1) The Central Government may, in consultation with the Chief Justice of India, remove from office of the Chairperson on Judicial Member of the Tribunal, who,–

(a) has been adjudged on insolvent; or

(b) has been convicted of an offence which, in the opinion of the Central Government, involves moral turpitude; or

(c) has become physically or mentally incapable; or

(d) has acquired such financial or other interest as a likely to affect prejudicially his functions; or

(e) has so abused his position as to render his continuance in office prejudicial to the public interest.

(2) The Chairperson or Judicial Member shall not be removed from his office except by an order made by the Central Government after an inquiry made by a Judge of the Supreme Court in which such Chairperson or Judicial Member has been informed of the charges against him and given a reasonable opportunity of being heard in respect of those charges.

(3) The Central Government may suspend from office the Chairperson or Judicial Member in respect of whom a reference of conducting an inquiry has been made to the Judge of the Supreme Court under sub-section (2), until the Central Government passes an order on receipt of the report of inquiry made by the Judge of the Supreme Court on such reference.

(4) The Central Government may, by rules, regulate the procedure for inquiry referred to in sub-section (2).

(5) The Expert Member may be removed from his office by an order of the Central Government on the grounds specified in sub-section (1) and in accordance with the procedure as may be notified by the Central Government;

Provided that the Expert Member shall not be removed unless he has beengiven an opportunity of being heard in the matter.

Section 11. To act as Chairperson of Tribunal or to discharge his functions in certain circustances

In the event of the occurrence of any vacancy in the office of the Chairperson of the Tribunal, by reason of his death, resignation or otherwise, such Judicial Member of the Tribunal as the Central Government may, be notification, authorised in this behalf, shall act as the Chairperson until the date on which a new Chairperson is appointed in accordance with the provisions of this Act.

Section 12. Staff of Tribunal

(1) The Central Government shall determine the nature and categories of the officers and other employees to assist the Tribunal in the discharge of its functions.

(2) The recruitment of the officers and other employees of the Tribunal shall be made by the Chairperson in such manner as may be prescribed.

(3) The officers and other employees of the Tribunal shall discharge their functions under the general superintendence of the Chairperson.

(4) The salaries and allowances and conditions of service of the officers and other employees of the Tribunal shall be such as may be prescribed.

Section 13. Financial and adminisrative powers of Chairperson

The Chairperson of the Tribunal shall exercise such financial and administrative powers as may be vested in him under the rules made by the Central Government:

Provided that the Chairperson may delegate such of his financial and administrative powers, as he may think fit, to any Judicial Member or Expert Member or officer of the Tribunal subject to the condition that the Member or such officer, while exercising such delegated power, continues to act under the direction, control and supervision of the Chairperson.

Chapter III – Jurisdiction, Powers and Proceedings of the Tribunal

Section 14. Tribunal to settle disputes

(1) The Tribunal shall have the jurisdiction over all civil cases where a substantial question relating to environment (including enforcement of any legal right relating to environment), is involved and such question arises out of the implementation of the enactment specified in Schedule I.

(2) The Tribunal shall hear the disputes arising from the questions referred to in sub-section (1) and settle such disputes and pass order thereon.

(3) No application for adjudication of dispute under this section shall be entertained by the Tribunal unless it is made within a period of six months from the date on which the cause of action for such dispute first arose;

Provided that the Tribunal may, if it is satisfied that the applicant was prevented by sufficient cause from filing the application within the said period, allow it to be filed within a further period not exceeding sixty days.

Section 15. Relief, compensation and restitution

(1) The Tribunal may, by an order, provide,—

(a) relief and compensation to the victims of pollution and other environmental damage arising under the enactments specified in the Schedule I (including accident occurring while handling any hazardous substance);

(b) for restitution of property damaged;

(c) for restitution of the environment for such area or areas, as the Tribunal may think fit.

(2) The relief and compensation and restitution of property and environment referred to in clauses (a), (b) and (c) of sub-section (1) shall be in addition to the relief paid or payable under the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991. (6 of 1991)

(3) No application for grant of any compensation or relief or restitution of property or environment under this section shall be entertained by the Tribunal unless it is made within a period of five years from the date on which the cause for such compensation or relief first arose:

Provided that the Tribunal may, if it is satisfied that the application was prevented by sufficient cause from filing the application within the said period, allow it to be filed within a further period not exceeding sixty days.

(4) The Tribunal may, having regard to the damage to public health, property and environment divided the compensation or relief payable under separate heads specified in Schedule II so as to provide compensation or relief to the claimants and for restitution of the damaged property or environment, as it may think fit.

(5) Every claimant of the compensation or relief under this act shall intimate to the Tribunal about the application filed to, or, as the case may be, compensation or relief received from, any other court or authority.

Section 16. Tribunal to have appellate jurisdiction

Any person aggrieved by, —-

(a) an order or decision, made, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, by the appellate authority under section 28 of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974; (6 of 1974)

(b) an order passed, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, by the State Government under section 29 of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974; ( 6 of 1974).

(c) direction issued, onor after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, by a Board, under section 33A of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974; (6 of 1974)

(d) an order or decision made, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, by the appellate authority under section 13 of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977; (36 of 1977)

(e) an order or decision made, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, by the State Government or other authority under section 2 of the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980; (69 of 1980);

(f) an order or decision, made, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, by the Appellate Authority under section 31 of the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981; (14 of 1981);

(g) any direction issued, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, under section 5 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986; (29 of 1986);

(h) an order made, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, granting environmental clearance in the area in which any industries, operations or processes or class of industries, operations and processes shall not be carried out or shall be carried out subject to certain safeguards under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986; (29 of 1986);

(i) an order made, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, refusing to grant environmental clearance for carrying out any activity or operation or process under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986; (29 of 1986);

(j) any determination of benefit sharing or order made, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, by the National Biodiversity Authority or a State Biodiversity Board under the provisions of the Biological Diversity Act, 2002, may, within a period of thirty days from the date on which the order or decision or direction or determination is communicated to him, prefer an appeal to the Tribunal (18 of 2003);

Provided that the Tribunal may, if it is satisfied that the appellant was prevented by sufficient cause from filing the appeal within the said period, allow it to be filed under this section within a further period not exceeding sixty days.

Section 17. Liability to pay relief or compensation in certain cases

(1) Where death of, or injury to, any person (other than a workman) or damage to any property or environment has resulted from an accident or the adverse impact of an activity or operation or process, under any enactment specified in Schedule I, the person responsible shall be liable to pay such relief or compensation for such death, injury or damage, under all or any of the heads specified in Schedule II, as may be determined by the Tribunal.

(2) If the death, injury or damage caused by an accident or the adverse impact of an activity or operation or process under any enactment specified in Schedule I cannot be attributed to any single activity or operation or process but in the combined or resultant effect of several such activities, operations and processes, the Tribunal may, apportion the liability for relief or compensation amongst those responsible for such activities, operations and processes on an equitable basis.

(3) The Tribunal shall, in case of an accident, apply the principle of no fault

Section 18. Application or appeal to Tribunal

(1) Each application under sections 14 and 15 or an appeal under section 16 shall, be made to the Tribunal in such form, contain such particulars, and, be accompanied by such documents and such fees as may be prescribed.

(2) Without prejudice to the provisions contained in section 16, an application for grant of relief or compensation or settlement of dispute may be made to the Tribunal by—

(a) the person, who has sustained the injury; or

(b) the owner of the property to which the damage has been caused; or

(c) where death has resulted from the environmental damage, by all or any of the legal representatives of the deceased; or

(d) any agent duly authorised by such person or owner of such property or all or any of the legal representatives of the deceased, as the case may be; or

(e) any person aggrieved, including any representative body or organisation; or

(f) the Central Government or a State Government or a Union territory Administration or the Central Pollution Control Board or a State Pollution Control Board or a Pollution Control Committee or a local authority, or any environmental authority constituted or established under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or any other law for the time being in force; (29 of 1986);

Provided that where all the legal representatives of the deceased have not joined in any such application for compensation or relief or settlement of dispute, the application shall be made on behalf of, or, for the benefit of all the legal representatives of the deceased and the legal representatives who have not so joined shall be imp leaded as respondents to the application;

Provided further that the person, the owner, the legal representative, agent, representative body or organisation shall not be entitled to make an application for grant of relief or compensation or settlement of dispute if such person, the owner, the legal representative, agent, representative body or organisation have preferred an appeal under section 16.

(3) The application, or as the case may be, the appeal filed before the Tribunal under this act shall be dealt with by it as expeditiously as possible and endeavour shall be made by it to dispose of the application, or, as the case may be, the appeal, after providing the parties concerned an opportunity to be heard.

Section 19. Procedure and powers of Tribunal

(1) The Tribunal shall not be bound by the procedure laid down by the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 but shall be guided by the principles of natural justice. (5 of 1908).

(2) Subject to the provisions of this Act, the Tribunal shall have power to regulate its own procedure.

(3) The Tribunal shall also not be bound by the rules of evidence contained in the Indian Evidence Act, 1872 (1 of 1872).

(4) The Tribunal shall have, for the purposes of discharging its functions under this Act, the same powers as are vested in a civil court under the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908, while trying a suit, in respect of the following matters, namely:— (5 of 1908).

(a) summoning and enforcing the attendance of any person and examining him on oath;

(b) requiring the discovery and production of documents;

(c) receiving evidence on affidavits;

(d) subject to the provisions of section 123 and 124 of the Indian Evidence Act, 1872, requisitioning any public record or document or copy of such record or document from any office; (1 of 1872).

(e) issuing commissions for the examination of witnesses or documents;

(f) reviewing its decision;

(g) dismissing an application for default or deciding it ex parte;

(h) setting aside any order of dismissal of any application for default or any order passed by it ex parte;

(i) pass an interim order (including granting an injunction or stay) after providing the parties concerned an opportunity to be heard, on any application made or appeal filed under this Act;

(j) pass an order requiring any person to cease and desist from committing or causing any violation of any enacetment specified in Schedule I;

(k) any other matter which may be prescribed.

(5) All proceedings before the Tribunal shall be deemed to the judicial proceedings within the meaning of section 193, 219 and 228 for the purposes of section 196 of the Indian Penal Code and the Tribunal shall be deemed to be a civil court for the purposes of section 195 and Chapter XXVI of the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973 (45 of 1860 & 2 of 1974).

Section 20. Tribunal to apply certain principles

The Tribunal shall, while passing any order or decision or award, apply the principles of sustanable development, the precuationary principle and the polluter pays principles.

Section 21. Decision to be taken by majority

The decision of the Tribunal by majority of Members shall be binding:

Provided that if there is a difference of opinion among the Members hearing an application or appeal, and the opinion is equally divided, the Chairperson shall hear (if he has not heard such application or appeal) such application or appeal and decide:

Provided further that where the Chairperson himself has heard such application or appeal alongwith other Members of the Tribunal, and if there is a difference of opinion among the Members in such cases and the opinion is equally divided, he shall refer the matter to other Members of the Tribunal who shall hear such application or appeal and decide.

Section 22. Appeal to Supreme Court

Any person aggrieved by any award, decision or order of the Tribunal, may, file an appeal to the Supreme Court, within ninety days from the date of communication of the award, decision order of the Tribunal, to him, on any one or more of the grounds specified in section 100 of the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 (5 of 1908).

Provided that the Supreme Court may entertain any appeal after the expiry of ninety days, if it is satisfied that the appellant was prevented by sufficient cause from preferring the appeal.

Section 23. Cost

(1) While disposing of an application or an appeal under this Act, the Tribunal shall have power to make such order as to costs, as it may consider necessary.

(2) Where the Tribunal holds that a not maintainable, or is false or vexatious, and such claim is disallowed, in whole or in part, the Tribunal may, if it so thinks fit, after recording its reasons for holding such claim to be false or vexatious, make an order to award costs, including lost benefits due to any interim injunctions.

Section 24. Deposit of amount payable for damage to environment

(1) Where any amount by way of compensation or relief is ordered to be paid under any award or order made by the Tribunal on the ground of any damage to environment, the amount shall be remitted to the authority specified under sub-section (3), of section 7A of the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 for being credited to the Environmental Relief Fund established under that section. (6 of 1991).

(2) The amount of compensation or relief credited to the Environmental Relief Fund under sub-section (1), may, notwithstanding anything contained in the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991, be utilised by such persons or authority, in such manner and for such purposes relating to environment, as may be prescribed. (6 of 1991).

Section 25. Execution of award or order or decision of Tribunal

(1) An award or order or decision of the Tribunal under this Act shall be executable by the Tribunal as a decree of a civil court, and for this purpose, the Tribunal shall have all the powers of a civil court.

(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (1), the Tribunal may transmit any order or award made by it to a civil court having local jurisdiction and such civil court shall execute the order or award as if it were a decree made by that court.

(3) Where the person responsible, for death of, or injury to any person or damage to any property and environment, against whom the award or order is made by the Tribunal, fails to make the payment or deposit the amount as directed by the Tribunal within the period so specified in the award or order, such amount, without prejudice to the filing of complaint for prosecution for an offence under this Act or any other law for the time being in force, shall be recoverable from the aforesaid person as arrears of land revenue or of public demand.

Chapter IV – Penalty

Section 26. Penalty for failure to comply with orders of Tribunal

(1) Whosever, fails to comply with any order or award or decision of the Tribunal under this act, he shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to three years, or with fine which may extend to ten crore rupees, or with both and in case the failure or contravention continues, with additional fine which may extend to twenty-five thousand rupees for every day during which such failure or contravention continues after conviction for the first such failure or contravention:

Provided that in case a company fails to with any order or award or a decision of the Tribunal under this Act, such company shall be punishable with fine which may extend to twenty-five crore rupees, and in case the failure or contravention continues, with additional fine which may extend to one lakh rupees for every day during which such failure or contravention continues after conviction for the first such failure or contravention.

(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, every offence under this Act shall be deemed to be non-cognizable within the meaning of the said Code. (2 of 1974).

Section 27. Offences by companies

(1) Where any offence under this act has been committed by a company, every person who, at the time the offence was committed, was directly in charge of, and was responsible to the company for the conduct of the business of the company, as well as the company, shall be deemed to be guilty of the offence and shall be liable to be proceeded against and punished accordingly;

Provided that nothing contained in this sub-section shall render any such person liable to any punishment provided in this Act, if he proves that the offence was committed without his knowledge or that he had exercised all due diligence to prevent the commission of such offence.

(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (1), where on offence under this Act has been committed by the company and it is proved that the consent or connivance of, or is attributable to any neglect on the part of, any director, manager, secretary or other officer of the company, such director, manager, secretary or other officer shall also be deemed to be guilty of that offence and shall be liable to be proceeded against and punished accordingly.

Explanation – For the purposes of this section, —-

(a) “company” means any body corporate and includes a firm or other association of individuals; and

(b) “director” in relation to a firm means a partner in the firm.

Section 28. Offences by Government Department

(1) Where any department of the Government fails to comply with any order or award or decision of the Tribunal under this Act, the Head of the Department shall be deemed to be guilty of such failure and shall be liable to be proceeded against for having committed an offence under this Act and punished accordingly:

Provided that nothing contained in this section shall render such Head of the Department liable to any punishment if he proves that the offence was committed without his knowledge or that the exercised all due diligence to prevent the commission of such offence.

(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (1), where an offence under this act has been committed by a Department of the Government and it is proved that the offence has been committed with the consent or connivance of, or is attributable to any neglect on the part of any officer, other than the head of the Department, such officer shall also be deemed to be guilty of that offence and shall be liable to be proceeded against and punished accordingly.

Chapter V – Miscellaneous

Section 29. Bar of jurisdiction

(1) With effect from the date of establishment of the Tribunal under this Act, no civil court shall have jurisdiction to entertain any appeal in respect of any matter, which the Tribunal is empowered to determine under its appellate jurisdiction.

(2) No civil court shall have jurisdiction to settle dispute or entertain any question relating to any claim for granting any relief or compensation or restitution of property damaged or environment damaged which may be adjudicated upon by the Tribunal and no injunction in respect of any action taken or to be taken by or before the Tribunal in respect of the settlement of such dispute or any such claim for granting any relief or compensation or restitution of property damaged or environment damaged shall be granted by the civil court.

Section 30. Cognizance of offences

(1) No court shall take cognizance of any offence under this act except on a complaint made by—

(a) the Central Government or any authority or officer authorised in this behalf by that Government; or

(b) any person who has given notice of not less than sixty days in such manner as may be prescribed, of the alleged offence and of his intention to make a complaint, to the Central Government or the authority or officer authorised as aforesaid.

(2) No court inferior to that of a Metropolitan Magistrate or, a Judicial Magistrate of the first class shall try any offence punishable under this Act.

Section 31. Members and staff of Tribunal to be public servants

The Chairperson, the Judicial and Expert Members, officers and other employees of the Tribunal shall be deemed to be public servants within the meaning of section 21 of the Indian Penal Code.

Section 32. Protection of action taken in good faith

(1) No suit or legal proceeding shall lie against the employees of the Central Government or a State Government or any statutory authority, for anything which is in good faith done or intended to be done in pursuance of this Act or any rule or order made there under.

(2) No suit, prosecution or other legal proceeding shall lie against the Chairperson or, Judicial Member or Expert Member of the Tribunal or any other person authorized by the Chairperson or Judicial Member or the Expert Member for anything which is in good faith done or intended to be done in pursuance of this Act or any rule or order made there under.

Section 33. Act to have overriding effect

The provisions of this Act, shall have effect notwithstanding anything inconsistent contained in any other law for the time being in force or in any instrument having effect by virtue of any law other than this Act.

Section 34. Power to amend Schedule I

(1) The Central Government may, by notification, amend the Schedule I by including therein any other act, enacted by Parliament having regard to the objective of environmental protection and conservation of natural resources, or omitting there from any act already specified therein and on the date of publication of such notification, such act shall be deemed to be included in or, as the case may be, omitted from the Schedule I.

(2) A copy of every notification proposed to be issued under sub-section (I), shall be laid in draft before each House of Parliament, while it is in session, for a total period of thirty days which may be comprised in one session or in two or more successive sessions, and if, before the expiry of the session immediately following the session or the successive sessions aforesaid, both Houses agree in disapproving the issue of the notification or both Houses agree in making any modification in the notification, the notification shall not be issued or, as the case may be, shall be issued only in such modified form as may be agreed upon by both the Houses.

Section 35. Power to make rules

(1) The Central Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette, make rules for carrying out the provisions of the Act.

(2) In particular, and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power, such rules may provide for all or any of the following matters, namely:—

(a) rules as to the persons who shall be entitled to appear before the Tribunal under clause (a) of sub-section (4) of section 4;

(b) the procedure for hearing applications and appeals and other matters pertaining to the applications and appeals under clause (b) of sub-section (4) of section 4;

(c) the minimum number of members who shall hear the applications and appeals in respect of any class or applications and appeals under clause (c) of sub-section (4) of section 4;

(d) the transfer of cases by the Chairperson from one place of sitting (including the ordinary place of sitting) to other place of sitting;

(e) the selection committed and the manner of appointment of the Judicial Member and Expert Member of the Tribunal under sub-section (3) of section 6;

(f) the salaries and allowances payable to, and other terms and conditions of service (including pension, gratuity and other retirement benefits) of, the Chairperson , Judicial Member and Expert Member of the Tribunal under section 9;

(g) the procedure for inquiry of the charges against the Chairperson or Judicial Member of the Tribunal under sub-section (4) of section 10;

(h) the recruitment of officers and other employees of the Tribunal under sub-section (2) of section 12; and the salaries and allowances and other conditions of service of the officers and other employees of the Tribunal under sub-section (4) of that section;

(i) the finanical and administrative powers to be exercised by the Chairperson of the Tribunal under section 13;

(j) the form of application or appeal, the particulars which it shall contain and the documents to be accompanied by and the fees payable under sub-section (1) of section 18;

(k) any such matter in respect of which the Tribunal shall have powers of a civil court under clause (k) of sub-section (4) of section 19;

(l) the manner and the purposes for which the amount of compensation or relief credited to the Environment Relief Fund shall be utilised under sub-section (2) of section 24;

(m) the manner of giving notice to make a complaint under clause (b) of sub-section (I) of section 30;

(n) any other matter which is required to be, or may be, specified by rules or in respect of which provision is to be made by rules.

(3) Every rule made under this Act by the Central Government shall be laid, as soon as may be after it is made, before each House of Parliament, while it is in session, for a total period of thirty days which may be comprised in one session or in two or more sucessive sessions, and if, before the expiry of the session immediately following the session or the successive sessions aforesaid, both Houses agree in making any modification in the rule or both Houses that the rule should not be made, the rule shall thereafter have effect only in such modified form or be of no effect as the case may be; so, however, that any such modification or ammunlment shall be without prejudice to the validity of anything previously done under that rule.

Section 36. Amendment of certain enactments

The enactments specified in the Schedule III to this Act be amended in the manner specified therein and such ammendments shall take effect on the date of establishment of the Tribunal

Section 37. Power to remove difficulties

(1) If any difficulty arises in giving effect to the provisions of this act, the Central Government, may, by order published in the Official Gazette, make such provisions, not inconsistent with the provisions of this Act as may appear to it to be necessary for removing the difficutly:

Provided that no such order shall be made after the expiry of a period of two years from the commencement of this Act.

(2) Every order made under this section shall be laid, as soon as may be after it is made, before each House of Parliament.

Section 38. Repeal and savings

(1) The National Environment Tribunal Act, 1995, and the National Environment Appellate Authority Act,1997 are hereby repealed (hereinafter referred to as the repealed Act.) (27 of 1995 and 22 of 1997).

(2) Notwithstanding such repeal, anything done or any action taken under the said Acts shall be deemed to have done or taken under the corresponding provisions of this Act.

(3) The National Environment Appellate Authority established under sub-section (1) of section 3 of the National Environment Appellate Authority Act, 1997, shall, on the establishment of the National Green Tribunal under the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, stand dissolved. (22 of 1997).

(4) On the dissolution of the National Environment Appellate Authority established under sub-section (1) of section 3 of the National Environment Appellate Authority Act, 1997, the persons appointed as the Chairperson, Vice-chairperson and every other person appointed as Member of the Said National Environment Appellate Authority and holding office as such immediately before the establishment of the National Green Tribunal under the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010 shall vacate their respective offices and no such chairperson, Vice-Chairperson and every other person appointed as member shall be entitled to claim any compensation for the premature termination of the term of his office or of any contract of service. (22 of 1997)

(5) All cases pending before the National Environment Appellate Authority established under sub-section (1) of section 3 of the National Environment Appellate Authority Act, 1997 on or before the establishment of the National Green Tribunal under the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, shall, on such establishment, stand transferred to the said National Green Tribunal and the National Green Tribunal shall dispose of such cases as if they were cases filed under that Act. (22 of 1997)

(6) The officers or other employees who have been, immediately before the dissolution of the National Environment Appellate Authority appointed on deputation basis to the National Environment Appellate Authority, shall on such dissolution stand reverted to their parent cadre, Ministry or Department, as the case may be.

(7) On the dissolution of the National Environment Appellate Authority, the officers and other employees appointed on contract basis under the National Environment Appellate Authority and holding office as such immediately before such dissolution, shall vacate their respective offices and such officers and other employees shall be entitled to claim compensation for three months’ pay and allowances or pay and allowances for the remaining period of service, whichever is less, for the premature termination of term of their office under their contract of service.

(8) The mention of the particular matters referred to in sub-sections (2) to (7) shall not be held to prejudice or affect the general application of section 6 of the General Clauses Act, 1897 with regard to the effect of repeal. (10 of 1897).

The Schedule I

[See Sections 14(1), 15(1), 17(1)(a), 17(2), 19(4)(j) and 34 (l)]

1. The Water (Preventtion and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974;

2. The Water (Prenvention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977;

3. The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980;

4. The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981;

5. The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986;

6. The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991;

7. The Biological Diversity Act, 2002.

The Schedule II

[See Sections 15(4) and 17(1)]

Heads Under Which Compensation Or Relief For Damage May be Claimed

(a) Death;

(b) Permanent, temporary, total or partial disability or other injury or sickness;

(c) Loss of wages due to total or partial disability or permanent or temporary disability;

(d) Medical expenses incurred for treatment of injuries or sickness;

(e) Damages to private property;

(f) Expenses incurred by the Government or any local authority in providing relief, aid and rehabilitation to the affected persons;

(g) Expenses incurred by the Government for any administrative or legal action or to cope with any harm or damage, including compensation for environmental degradation and restoration of the quality of environment;

(h) Loss to the Government or local authority arising out of, or connected with, the activity causing any damage;

(i) Claims on account of any harm, damage or destruction to the fauna including milch and draught animals and aquatic fauns;

(j) Claims on account of any harm, damage or destruction to flora including aquatic flora, crops, vegetables, trees and orchards;

(k) Claims including cost of restoration on account of any harm or damage to environment including pollution of soil, air, water, land and eco-systems;

(l) Loss and destruction of any property other than private property;

(m) Loss of business or employment or both;

(n) Any other claim arising out of, or connected with, any activity of handling of hazardous substance.

The Schedule III

[See Sections 36]

Amendment to certain enactments

Part I

Amendment to the water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 (6 of 1974)

Insertion of new section 33B:

After section 33A, the following section shall be inserted, namely:–

Appeal to National Green Tribunal:

“33B. Any person aggrieved by,—

(a) an order or decision of the appellate authority under section 28, made on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010; or

(b) an order passed by the State Government under section 29, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010; or

(c) directions issued under section 33A by a Board, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, may file an appeal to the National Green Tribunal established under section 3 of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, in accordance with the provisions of that Act.”.

Part II

Amendments to the water (Prevention and control, of pollution) Cess Act, 1977 (36 of 1977)

Amendment of section 13:

In section 13, in sub – section (4), for the words “shall be final”, the words, figures and letters “shall, if no appeal has been filed under section 13A, be final ” shall be substituted.

Insertion of new section 13A:

After section 13, the following section shall be inserted, namely:–

Appeal to National Green Tribunal:

“13A, Any person aggrieved, by an order or decision of the appellate authority made under section 13, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, may file an appeal to the National Green Tribunal established under section 3 of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, in accordance with the provisions of that Act.”.

Part III

Amendment to the forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 (69 of 1980).

Insertion of new section 2A:

After section 2, the following section shall be inserted, namely:–

Appeal to National Green Tribunal:

“2A, Any person aggrieved, by an order or decision of the State Government or other authority made under section 2, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, may file an appeal to the National Green Tribunal established under section 3 of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, in accordance with the provisions of that Act.”.

Part IV

Amendment to the Air (Prevention and control of pollution) Act, 1981 (14 of 1981).

Insertion of new section 31B:

After section 31A, the following section shall be inserted, namely:–

Appeal to National Green Tribunal:

“31B, any person aggrieved by an order or decision of the Appellate Authority under section 31, made on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, may file an appeal to the National Green Tribunal established under section 3 of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, in accordance with the provisions of that Act.”.

Part V

Amendment to the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 (29 of 1986).

Insertion of new section 5A:

After section 5, the following section shall be inserted, namely:–

Appeal to National Green Tribunal:

“5A, Any person aggrieved by any directions issued under section 5, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, may file appeal to the National Green Tribunal under section 3 of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, in accordance with the provisions of that Act.”.

Part VI

Amendment to the Biological Diversity Act, 2002. (18 of 2003).

Amendment of section 52:

In section 52, after the proviso, the following provision shall be inserted, namely:–

Provided further that nothing contained in this section shall apply on and from the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010:

Provided also that any appeal pending before the High Court, before the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, shall continue to be heard and disposed of by the High Court as if the National Green Tribunal had not been established under section 3 of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010.”.

Insertion of new section 52A:

After section 52, the following section shall be inserted, namely:–

Appeal to National Green Tribunal:

“52A, any person aggrieved by any determination of benefit sharing or order of the National Biodiversity Authority or a State Biodiversity Board under this Act, on or after the commencement of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, may file an appeal to the National Green Tribunal established under section 3 of the National Green Tribunal Act, 2010, in accordance with the provisions of that Act.”.

V.K. Bhasin,

Secy. to the Govt. of India.

Negotiable Instruments Act

Chapter I – Preliminary

Section 1. Short title.

(26 of 1881)

(9th December, 1881)

An Act to define and Law relating to Promissory Notes, Bills of Exchange and cheques.

WHEREAS it is expedient to define and amend the law relating to promissory notes, bills of exchange and cheques.It is hereby enacted as follows:

This Act may be called the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881.

Local extent, Saving of usage relating to hundis, etc., Commencement.-It extends to [the whole of India ] but nothing herein contained affects the Indian Paper Currency Act, 1871 (3 of 1871), section 2, or affects any local usage relating to any instrument in an oriental language : Provided that such usages may be excluded by any words in the body of the instrument, which indicate and intention that the legal relations of the parties thereto shall be governed by this Act; and it shall come into force on the first day of March, 1882.

1. The Act has been extended to Goa, Daman, and Diu by Regulation 12 of 1962, sec. 3 and Sch. (w.e.f. 1-12-1965) and to Dadra and Nagar Haveli by Regulation 6 of 1963, sec. and Sch. I (w.e.f. 1-11-1956).

2. Substituted by the A.O. 1950, for “all the Provinces of India”.

3. The Words “except the State of Jammu and Kashmir” omitted by Act 62 of 1956, sec. 2 and Sch. (w.e.f. 1-11-1956).

Section 2. Repeal of enactments.

[Rep. By the Amending Act, 1891 (12 of 1891), sec. 2 and Sch. I, Pt. I.

Section 3. Interpretation clause

In this Act

1[* * *]

“Banker”: 2[“banker” includes any person acting as a banker and any post office savings bank].

3[* * *]

1. Definition of “India” omitted by Act 62 of 1956, sec. 2 and Sch. (w.e.f. 1-11-1956) .

2. Substituted by Act 37 of 1955, sec. 2 for the definition of word “banker” (w.e.f. 1-4-1956).

3. Definition of “notary public” omitted by Act 53 of 1952, sec.16 (w.e.f. 14-2-1956).

INTRODUCTION

In India, there is reason to believe that instrument to exchange were in use from early times and we find that papers representing money were introducing into the country by one of the Mohammedan sovereigns of Delhi in the early part of the fourtheenth century. The word ‘hundi’, a generic term used to denote instruments of exchange in vernacular is derived from the Sanskrit root ‘hund’ meaning ‘to collect’ and well expresses the purpose to which instruments were utilised in their origin. With the advent of British rule in India commercial activities increased to a great extent. The growing demands for money could not be met be mere supply of coins; and the instrument of credit took the function of money which they represented.

Before the enactment of the Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881, the law of negotiable instruments as prevalent in England was applied by the Courts in India when any question relating to such instruments arose between Europeans. When then parties were Hindu or Mohammedans, their personal law was held to apply. Though neither the law books of Hindu nor those of Mohammedans contain any reference to negotiable instruments as such, the customs prevailing among the merchants of the respective community were recognised by the courts and applied to the transactions among them. During the course of time there had developed in the country a strong body of usage relating to hundis, which even the Legislature could not without hardship to Indian bankers and merchants ignore. In fact, the Legislature felt the strength of such local usages and though fit to exempt them from the operation of the Act with a proviso that such usage may be excluded altogether by appropriate words. In the absence of any such customary law, the principles derived from English law were applied to the Indians as rules of equity justice and good conscience.

The history of the present Act is a long one. The Act was originally drafted in 1866 by the India Law Commission and introduced in December, 1867 in the Council and it was referred to a Select Committee. Objections were raised by the mercantile community to the numerous deviations from the English Law which it contained. The Bill had to be redrafted in 1877. After the lapse of a sufficient period for criticism by the Local Governments, the High Courts and the chambers of commerce, the Bill was revised by a Select Committee. In spite of this Bill could not reach the final stage. In 1880 by the Order of the Secretary of State, the Bill had to be referred to a new Law Commission. On the recommendation of the new Law Commission the Bill was re-drafted and again it was sent to a Select Committee which adopted most of the additions recommended by the new Law Commission. The draft thus prepared for the fourth time was introduced in the Council and was passed into law in 1881 being the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 (26 of 1881)

Chapter II – Of Notes, Bills And Cheques

Section 4. “Promissory note”.

A “promissory note” is an instrument in writing (not being a bank-note or a currency-note) containing an unconditional undertaking signed by the maker, to pay a certain sum of money only to, or to the order of, a certain person, or to the bearer of the instrument

Section 5. “Bill of exchange”.

A “bill of exchange” is an instrument in writing containing an unconditional order, signed by the maker, directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money only to, or to the order of, a certain person or to the bearer of the instrument.

A promise or order to pay is not “conditional”, within the meaning of this section and section 4, by reason of the time for payment of the amount or any installment thereof being expressed to be on the lapse of certain period after the occurrence of a specified event which, according to the ordinary expectation of mankind, is certain to happen, although the time of its happening may be uncertain.

The sum payable may be “certain”, within the meaning of this section and section and section4, although it includes future indicated rater of change, or is according to the course of exchange, or is according to the course of exchange, and although the instrument provides that, on default of ayment of an installment, the balance unpaid shall become due. The person to whom it is clear that the direction is given or that payment is to be made may be a “certain person,” within the meaning of this section and section 4, although he is misnamed or designated by description only

Section 6. Cheque

1[6. “Cheque”

A ”cheque” is a bill of exchange drawn on a specified banker and not expressedto be payable otherwise than on demand and it includes the electronic image of a truncated cheque and a cheque in the electronic form.

Explanation I.-For the purposes of this section, the expressions

(a) “A cheque in the electronic form” means a cheque which contains the exact mirror image of a paper cheque, and is generated, written and signed in a secure system ensuring the minimum safety standards with the use of digital signature (with or without biometrics signature) and asymmetric crypto system;

(b) “A truncated cheque” means a cheque which is truncated during the course of a clearing cycle, either by the clearing house or by the bank whether paying or receiving payment, immediately on generation of an electronic image for transmission, substituting the further physical movement of the cheque in writing.

Explanation II.-For the purposes of this section, the expression “clearing house” means the clearing house managed by the Reserve Bank of India or a clearing house recognised as such by the Reserve Bank of India.]

1. Substituted for section 6 Act No. 55 of 2002, sec. 2 for “A “cheque” is a bill of exchange drawn on a specified banker and not expressed to be payable otherwise than on damand” (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 7. Drawer, drawee

The maker of a bill of exchange or Cheque is called the “drawer”; the person thereby directed to pay is called the “Drawee”.

“Drawee in case of need “: When the bill or in any endorsement thereon the name of any person is given in addition to the drawee to be resorted to in case of need such person is called a “drawee in case of need”.

“Acceptor”: After the drawee of a bill has signed his assent upon the bill, or, if there are more parts thereof than one, upon one of such part, and delivered the same, or given notice of such signing to the holder or to some person on his behalf, he is called the “acceptor”.

“Acceptor for honour”: 1[When a bill of exchange has been noted or protested for non-acceptance or for better security], and any person accepts it supra protest for honour of the drawer or of any one of the endorser, such person is called an “acceptor for honour”.

“Payee”: The person named in the instrument, to whom or to whose order the money is by the instrument directed to be paid, is called the “payee”.

1. Substituted by Act 2 of 1885, sec. 2 for “When acceptance is refused and the bill is protested form on-acceptance”.

Section 8. “Holder”.

The “holder” of a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque means any person entitled in his own name to the possession thereof and to receive or recover the amount due thereon from the parties thereto.

Where the note, bill or cheque is lost or destroyed, its holder is the person so entitled at the time of such loss or destruction.

Section 9. “Holder in due course”.

“Holder in due course” means any person who for consideration became the possessor of a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque if payable to bearer, or the payee or indorse thereof, if [payable to order] before the amount mentioned in it became payable, and without having sufficient cause to believe that any defect existed in the title of the person from whom he derived his title.

1. Subs. by Act 8 of 1919, sec. 2, for “payable to, or to the order of, a payee.

Section 10. “Payment in due course”.

“Payment in due course” means payment in accordance with the apparent tenor of the instrument in good faith and without negligence to any person in possession thereof under circumstances which do not afford a reasonable ground for believing that he is not entitled to receive payment of the amount therein mentioned.

Section 11. “Inland instrument”.

A promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque drawn or made in [India] and made payable in, or drawn upon any person resident in, [Indian] shall be deemed to be an inland instrument.

1. Substituted by Act 36 of l957, sec. 3 and Sch. II, for wards” a State”.

Section 12. “Foreign instrument”.

Any such instrument not so drawn, made or made payable shall be deemed to be a foreign instrument.

Section 13. “Negotiable instrument”.

[(1) A “negotiable instrument” means a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque payable either to order or to bearer.

Explanation (i).- A promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque is payable to order which is expressed to be so payable to a particular person, and does not contain words prohibiting transfer or indicating an intention that it shall not be transferable.

Explanation (ii).- A promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque is payable to bearer which is expressed to be so payable or on which the only or last endorsements is an endorsement is an endorsement in blank.

Explanation (iii) Where a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque, either originally or by endorsement, is expressed to be payable to the order of a specified person, and not to him or his order, it is nevertheless payable to him or his order at his option.]

(2) A negotiable instrument may be made payable to two or more payees jointly, or it may be made payable in the alternative to one or two, or one or some of several payees.]

1. Substituted by Act 8 of 1919, sec. 3, for sub-section (1).

2. Ins. by Act 5 of 1914, sec. 2.

Section 14. Negotiation.

When a promise note, bill of exchange or cheque is transferred to any person, so as to continue the person the holder thereof, the instrument is said to be negotiated.

Section 15. Endorsement.

When the marker or holder of an negotiable instrument signs the same, otherwise than as such maker, for the purpose of negotiation, one the back or face thereof or on a slip of paper annexed thereto, or so signs for the same purpose a stamped paperintended to be completed as a negotiable instrument, he is said to indorse the same, and is called the endorser.

Section 16. Endorsement in blank and in full-endorsee

1[(1)] If the endorser signs his name only, the endorsement is said to be “in blank”, and if he adds a direction to pay the amount mentioned in the instrument to, or to the order of, a specified person, the endorsement is said to be “in full”, and the person so specified is called the “endorsee” of the instrument.

2[(2) The provisions of this Act relating to a payee shall apply with the necessary modifications to an endorsee.]

1. Section 16 renumbered as sub-section. (1) by Act 5 of 1914, sec. 3.

2. Added by Act 5 of 1914, sec. 3.

Section 17. Ambiguous instruments.

Where an instrument may be construed either as a promissory note or bill of exchange, the holder may at his election treat it as either and the instrument shall be thenceforward treated accordingly.

Section 18. Where amount is stated differently in figures and words.

If the amount undertaken or ordered to be paid is stated differently in figures and in words, the amount stated in words shall be the amount undertaken or ordered to be paid.

Section 19. Instruments payable on demand.

A promissory note or bill of exchange, in which no time for payment is specified, and, a cheque, are payable on demand.

Section 20.Inchoate stamped instruments.

Where one person signs and delivers to another a paper stamped in accordance with the law relating to negotiable instruments then in force in [India], and either wholly blank or having written thereon an incomplete negotiable instrument, he thereby gives prima facie authority to the holder thereof to make or complete, as then case may be, upon it a negotiable instrument, instrument, for any amount specified therein and not exceeding the amount covered by the stamp. The person so signing shall be liable upon such instrument, in the capacity in which he signed the same, to any holder in due course for such amount, provided that no person other than a holder in due course shall recover from the person delivering the instrument anything in excess of the amount intended by him to be paid thereunder.

1. Substituted by Act 3 of 1951, sec. 3 and Sch., for “the States”.

Section 21. “At sight”, “On presentment”, “After sight”.

In a promissory note or bill of exchange the expressions “at sight” and “on presentment” means on demand. The expression “after sight” means, in a promissory note, after presentment for sight, and, in a bill of exchange after acceptance, or noting for non-acceptance, or nothing for non-acceptance, or protest for non-acceptance.

Section 22. “Maturity”.

The maturity of a promissory note or bill of exchange is the date at which it falls due.

Days of grace.-Every promissory note or bill of exchange which is not expressed to be payable on demand, at sight or on presentment is at maturity on the third day after the day on which it is expressed to be payable.

Section 23. Calculating maturity of bill or note payable so many months after date or sight

In calculating the date at which a promissory note or bill of exchange, made payable at stated number of months after date or after sight, or after a certain event, is at maturity, the period stated shall be held to terminate on the day of months, which corresponds with the day on which the instrument is dated, or presented for acceptance or sight, or noted for non-acceptance, or protested for non-acceptance, or the event happens or, where the instrument is a bill of exchange made payable a stated number of months after sight and has been accepted for honour, with the day on which it was so accepted. If the month in which the period would terminate has no corresponding day, the period shall be held to terminate on the last day of such month.

Illustrations

(a) A negotiable instrument dated 29th January, 1878, is made payable at one month after date. The instrument is at maturity on the third day after the 28th February, 1878.

(b) A negotiable instrument, dated 30th August, 1878, is made payable three months after date. The instrument is at maturity on the 3rd December, 1878.

(c) A promissory note or bill of exchange, dated 31st August, 1878, is made payable three months after date. The instrument is at maturity on the 3rd December, 1878.

Section 24. Calculating maturity of bill or note payable so many days after date so sight.

In calculating the date at which a promissory note or bill of exchange made payable a certain number of days after date of after sight or after a certain event is at maturity, the day of the date, or of presentment for acceptance or sight, or of protest for non-acceptance, or on which the event happens, shall be excluded.

Section 25. When day of maturity is a holiday

When the day on which a promissory note or bill of exchange is at maturity is a public holiday, the instrument shall be deemed to be due on the next preceding business day.

Explanation: The Expression “Public Holiday” includes Sunday” 1[***] and any other day declared by the 2[Central Government], by notification in the Official Gazette, to be a public holiday.

1. Words “New-Year’s day, Christmas day: if either of such days falls on a Sunday, the next following Monday; Good Friday;” omitted by Act 37 of 1955, sec. 3 (w.e.f. 1-4-1956).

2. Substituted by the AO 1937, for “Local Government”.

Chapter III – Parties To Notes, Bills And Cheques

Section 26. Capacity to make, etc., promissory notes, etc.

Every person capable of contracting, according to the law to which he is subject, may bind himself and be bound by the making, drawing, acceptance, endorsement, delivery and negotiation of a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque.

Minor.- A minor may draw, indorse, deliver and negotiate such instruments to as to bind all parties except himself.

Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to empower a corporation to make, indorse or accept such instruments except in cases in which, under the law for the time being in force, they are so empowered.

Section 27. Agency.

Every person capable of binding himself or of being bound, as mentioned in section 26, may so bind himself or be bound by a duly authorised agent acting in his name.

A general authority to transact business and to receive and discharge debts does not confer upon an agent the power of accepting or indorsing bills of exchange so as to bind his principal.

An authority to draw bills of exchange does not of itself impart an authority to endorse.

Section 28. Liability of agent signing.

An agent who sign his name to a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque without indicating thereon that he signs as agent, or that he does not intend thereby to incur personal responsibility, is liable personally on the instrument, except to those who induced him to sign upon the belief that the principal only would be held liable.

Section 29. Liability of legal representative signing.

A legal representative of a deceased person who sign his name to a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque is liable personally thereon unless he expressly limits his liability to the extent of the assets received by him as such.

Section 30. Liability of drawer

The drawer of a bill of exchange or cheque is bound in case of dishonour by the drawee or acceptor thereof, to compensate the holder, provided due notice of dishonour has been give to, or received by, the drawer as hereinafter provided.

Section 31. Liability of drawee of cheque.

The drawee of a cheque having sufficient funds of the drawer in his hands properly applicable to the payment of such cheque must pay the cheque when duly required so to do, and, in default of such payment, must compensate the drawer for any loss or damage caused by such default.

Section 32. Liability of maker of note and acceptor of bill.

In the absence of contract to the contrary, the maker of a promissory note and the acceptor before maturity of a bill of exchange are bound to pay the amount thereof at maturity according to the apparent tenor of the note or acceptance respectively, and the acceptor of a bill of exchange at or after maturity is bound to pay the amount thereof to the holder on demand.

In default of such payment as aforesaid, such maker or acceptor is bound to compensate any party to the note or bill for any loss or damage sustained by him and caused by such default.

Section 33. Only drawee can be acceptor except in need for honour.

No person except the drawee of a bill of exchange, or all or some of several drawees, or a person named therein as a drawee in case of need, or an acceptor for honour, can bind himself by an acceptance.

Section 34. Acceptance by several drawee not partners.

Where there are several drawees of a bill of exchange who are not partners, each of them can accept if for himself, but non of the them can accept it for another without his authority.

Section 35. Liability of endorser.

In the absence of a contract to the contrary, whoever indorses and delivers a negotiable instrument before maturity, without in such endorsement, expressly excluding or making conditional his own liability, is bound thereby to every subsequent holder, in case of dishonour by the drawee, acceptor or maker, to compensate such holder for any loss or damage caused to him by such dishonor, provided due notice of dishonour has been given to, or received by, such endorser as hereinafter provided.

Every endorser after dishonour is liable as upon an instrument payable on demand.

Section 36. Liability of prior parties to holder in due course.

Every prior party to a negotiable instrument is liable thereon to a holder in due course until the instrument is duly satisfied.

Section 37. Maker, drawer and acceptor principals.

The maker of a promissory note or cheque, the drawer of bill of exchange until acceptance, and the acceptor are, in the absence of a contract to the contrary, respectively liable thereon as principal debtors, and the other parties thereto are liable thereon as sureties for the maker, drawer or acceptor, as the case may be.

Section 38. Prior party a principal in respect of each subsequent party.

As between the parties so liable as sureties, each prior party is, in the absence of a contract to the contrary. Also liable thereon as a principal debtor in respect of each subsequent party.

ILLUSTRATION

A draws a bill payable to his own order on B, who accepts, A afterwards endorses the bill to C, C to D to E. As between E and B, B is the principal debtor, and A, C and D are his sureties. As between E and A., A is the principal debtor, and C and D are his sureties. As between E and C, C is the principal debtor and D is his surety.

Section 39. Surety ship.

When the holder of an accepted bill of exchange enters into any contract with the acceptor which, under section 134 or 135 of the Indian Contract Act,1872 ( 9 of 1872), would discharge the other parties, the holder may expressly reserve his right to charge the other parties, and in such case they are not discharged.

Section 40. Discharge of endorser’s liability.

Where the holder of a negotiable instrument, without the consent of the endorser, destroys or impairs the endorser’s remedy against a prior party, the endorser is discharged from liability to the holder to the same extent as if the instrument had been paid at maturity.

Illustration

A is the holder of a bill of exchange made payable to the order of B, which contains the following endorsements in blank

First endorsement, “B”.

Second endorsement, “Peter Williams”.

Third endorsement, “Wright & Co.”.

Fourth endorsement “John Rozario”.

This bill A puts in suit against John Rozario and strikes out, without John Rosario’s consent, the endorsements by Peter Williams and Wright & Co. A is not entitled to recover any thing from John Rozario.

Section 41. Acceptor bound, although endorsement forged.

An acceptor of a bill of exchange already indorsed is not relieved from liability by reason that such endorsement is forged, if he knew or had reason to believe the endorsement to be forged when he accepted the bill.

Section 42. Acceptance of bill drawn in fictitious name.

An acceptor of a bill of exchange drawn in a fictitious name and payable to the drawer’s order is not, by reason that such name is fictitious, relieved from liability to any holder in due course claiming under an endorsement by the same hand as the drawer’s signature, and purporting to be made by the drawer.

Section 43. Negotiable instrument made, etc., without consideration.

A negotiable instrument made, drawn, accepted, indorsed, or transferred without consideration, or for a consideration which fails, creates no obligation of payment between the parties to the transaction. But if any such party has transferred the instrument with or without endorsement to a holder for consideration, such holder, and every subsequent holder deriving title from him, may recover the amount due on such instrument from the transferor for consideration or any prior party thereto.

Exception I.- No party for whose accommodation a negotiable instrument has been made, drawn, accepted or indorsed can, if he has paid the amount thereof, recover thereon such amount from any person who became a party to such instrument for his accommodation.

Exception II.-No party to the instrument who has induced any other party to make, draw, accept, indorse or transfer the same to him for a consideration which he has failed to pay or perform in full shall recover there in an amount exceeding the value of the consideration (if any) which he has actually paid or performed.

Section 44. Partial absence or failure of money-consideration.

When the consideration for which a person signed a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque consisted of money, and was originally absence in part relation with such signer id entitled to receive from him is proportionally reduced.

Explanation.-The drawer of a bill of exchange stands in immediate relating with the acceptor. The maker of a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque stands in immediate relation with the payee, and the endorser with his endorsee. Other signers may by agreement stand in immediate relation with a holder.

Illustration

A draws a bill on B for Rs. 500 payable to the order of A. B accepts the bill, but subsequently dishonours it by non-payment. A sues B on the bill. B proves that it was accepted for value as to Rs. 400, and as an accommodation to the plaintiff as to the residue. A can only recover Rs. 400.

Section 45. Partial failure of consideration not consisting of money.

Where a part of the consideration for which a person signed a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque, though not consisting of money, is ascertainable in money without collateral enquiry, and there has been a failure of that party, the sum which a holder standing in immediate relation with such signer is entitled to receive from him is proportionally reduced.

Section 45A. Holder’s right to duplicate of lost bill

1[45A. Holder’s right to duplicate of lost bill

Where a bill of exchange has been lost before it is overdue, the person who was the holder of it may apply to the drawer to give him another bill of the same tenor, giving security to the drawer, if required, to indemnify him against all persons whatever in case the bill alleged to have been lost shall be found again.

If the drawer on request as aforesaid refuses to give such duplicate bill, he may be compelled to do so].

1. Inserted by Act 2 of 1885, sec. 3.

Chapter IV – Of Negotiation

Section 46. Delivery.

The making, acceptance or endorsement of a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque is completed by delivery, actual or constructive.

As between parties standing in immediate relation; delivery to be effectual must be made by the party making accepting or indorsing the instrument, or by a person authorised by him in that behalf.

As between such parties and any holder of the instrument other than a holder in due course, it may be shown that the instrument was delivered conditionally or for a special purposes only, and not for the purpose of transferring absolutely the property therein.

A promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque payable to bearer is negotiable by the deliver thereof.

A promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque payable to bearer is negotiable by the deliver thereof.

Section 47. Negotiation by delivery.

Subject to the provisions of section 58, a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque payable to bearer is negotiable by deliver thereof.

Exception.-a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque delivered on condition that it is not to take effect except in a certain event is not negotiable (except in the hands of a holder for value without notice of the condition) unless such event happens.

Section 48. Negotiation by endorsements.

Subject to the provisions of section 58, a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque [payable to order], is negotiable by the holder by endorsement and delivery thereof

1. Substituted by Act 8 of 1919, sec. 4, for “payable to the order of a specified person, or to a specified person or order”.

Section 49. Conversion of endorsement in blank into endorsement in full.

The holder of a negotiable instrument indorsed in blanks may, without signing his own name, by writing above the endorser’s signature a direction to pay to any other person as endorsee, convert the endorsement in full; and the holder does not thereby incur the responsibility of an endorser.

Section 50. Effect of indorsement.

The of a negotiable instrument followed by delivery transfers to the indorsee the property therein with the right of further negotiation; but the indorsement may be express words, restrict or exclude such right, or may merely constitute the indorsee an agent to indorse the instrument, or to receive its contents for the indorser, or for some other specified person.

Section 51. Who may negotiate.

Every sole maker, drawer, payee or indorsee, or all of several joint makers, drawers, payee or indorsees, of a negotiable instrument may, if the negotiability of such instrument has not been restricted or excluded as mentioned in section 50, indorse and negotiate the same.

Explanation.-Nothing in this section enables a maker or drawer to indorse or is holder thereof, or enables a payee or indorse to indorse or negotiate an instrument, unless he is holder thereof.

Section 52. Indorser who excludes his own liability or maker it conditional.

The indorser of a negotiable instrument may, by express words in the indorsement, exclude his own liability thereon, or make such liability or the right of the indorsee to receive the amount due thereon depend upon the happening of a specified event, although such event may never happen.

Where an indorser so excludes his liability and afterwards becomes the holder of the instrument all intermediate indorsers are liable to him.

Section 53. Holder deriving title from holder in due course.

a holder of a negotiable instrument who derives title from a holder in due course has the rights thereon of that holder in due course.

Section 54. Instrument indorsed in blank.

Subject to the provisions hereinafter contained crossed cheques, a negotiable instrument indorsed in blank is payable to the bearer thereof even although originally payable to order.

Section 55. Conversion of indorsement in blank into indorsement in full.

If a negotiable instrument, after having been indorsed in blank, is indorsed in full, the amount of it cannot be claimed from the indorser in full, except by the person to whom it has been indorsed in full, or by one who derives title through such person.

56. Indorsement for part of sum due.

No writing on a negotiable instrument is valid for the purpose of negotiation of such writing purports to transfer only a part of the amount appearing to be due on the instrument; but where such amount has been partly paid a note to that effect may be indorsed on the instrument, which may then be negotiated for the balance.

Section 57. Legal representative cannot by delivery only negotiate instrument indorsed by deceased.

The legal representative of a deceased person cannot negotiate by delivery only a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque payable to order and indorsed by the deceased but not delivered.

Section 58. Instrument obtained by unlawful means or for unlawful consideration.

When a negotiable instrument has been lost, or has been obtained form any maker, acceptor or holder thereof by means of offence or fraud, or for an unlawful consideration, no possessor or indorsee who claims through the person who found or so obtained the instrument is entitled to receive the amount due thereon from such maker, acceptor or holder, or from any party prior to such holder, unless such possessor or indorsee is, or some person through whom he claims was, a holder thereof in due course.

Section 59. Instrument acquired after dishonour or when overdue.

The holder of a negotiable instrument, who has acquired it after dishonour, whether by non-acceptance or non-payment, with notice thereof, or after maturity, has only, as against the other parties, the rights thereon of his transferor;

Accommodation note or bill.- Provided that any person who, in good faith and for consideration, becomes the holder, after maturity, of a promissory note or bill of exchange made, drawn or accepted without consideration, for the purpose of enabling some party thereto to raise money thereon, may recover the amount of the note or bill from any prior party.

Illustration

The acceptor of a bill of exchange, when he accepted it, deposited with the drawer certain goods as a collateral security for the payment of the bill, with power to the drawer to sell the goods and apply the proceeds in discharge of the bill if it were not paid at maturity. The bill not having been paid in maturity, the drawer sold the goods and retained the proceeds, but endorsed the bill to A.. A’s title is subject to the same objection as the drawer’s title.

Section 60. Instrument negotiable till payment or satisfaction.

A negotiable instrument may be negotiated (except by the maker, drawee or acceptor after maturity) until payment or satisfaction thereof by the maker, drawee or acceptor at or after maturity, but not after sect payment or satisfaction.

Chapter V – Of Presentment

Section 61. Presentment for acceptance.

A bill of exchange payable after sight must, if no time or place is specified therein for presentment, be presented to the draweee thereof for acceptance, if he can, after reasonable search, be found, by a person entitled to demand acceptance, within a reasonable time after it is drawn, and in business hours on a business day, in default of such presentment, on party thereto is liable thereon to the person making such default. If the drawee cannot, after reasonable search, be found, the bill is dishonoured.

If the bill is directed to the drawee at a particular place, it must be presented at that place, and if art the due date for presentment he cannot, after reasonable search, be found thereon, the bill is dishonoured.

[Where authorized by agreement or usage, a presentment through the post office by means of a registered letter is sufficient.]

1. Added by Act 2 of 1885, sec. 4.

Section 62. Presentment of promissory note for sight.

A promissory note, payable at a certain period after sight must be presented to the maker thereof for sight ( if he can after reasonable search be found ) by a person entitled to demand payment, within a reasonable time after it is made and in business hours on a business day. In default of such presentment, no party thereto is liable thereon to the person making such default.

Section 63. Drawee’s time for deliberation.

The holder must, if so required by the drawee of a bill of exchange presented to him for acceptance, allow the drawee [forty –eight ] hours (exclusive of public holidays ) to consider whether he will accept it.

1. Substituted by Act l2 of 1921, sec. 2 for “twenty-four”.

Section 63. Drawee’s time for deliberation.

The holder must, if so required by the drawee of a bill of exchange presented to him for acceptance, allow the drawee [forty –eight ] hours (exclusive of public holidays ) to consider whether he will accept it.

1. Substituted by Act l2 of 1921, sec. 2 for “twenty-four”.

Section 64. Presentment for payment

1[(1)] Promissory notes, bill of exchange and cheques must be presented for payment to the maker, acceptor or drawee thereof respectively, by or on behalf or the holder as hereinafter provided. In default of such presentment, the other parties thereto are not liable thereon to such holder.

2[Where authorized by agreement or usage, a presentment through the post office by means of a registered letter is sufficient.]

Exception:-Where a promissory note is payable on demand and is not payable at a specified place, no presentment is necessary in order to charge the maker thereof.

3[“(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in section 6, where an electronic image of a truncated cheque is presented for payment, the drawee bank is entitled to demand any further information regarding the truncated cheque from the bank holding the truncated cheque in case of any reasonable suspicion about the genuineness of the apparent tenor of instrument, and if the suspicion is that of any fraud, forgery, tampering or destruction of the instrument, it is entitled to further demand the presentment of the truncated cheque itself for verification:

Provided that the truncated cheque so demanded by the drawee bank shall be retained by it, if the payment is made accordingly.]

1. Section 64 renumbered as sub-section (1) thereof by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 3 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

2. Inserted by Act 2 of 1885, sec. 4.

3. Inserted by Act No. 55 of 2002. sec. 3 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003)

Section 65. Honours for presentment.

Presentment for payment must be made during the usual hours of business and, if at a banker’s, within banking hours.

Section 66. Presentment for payment of instrument payable after date or sight.

a promissory note or bill of exchange, made payable at a specified period after date or sight thereof, must be presented for payment at maturity.

Section 67. Presentment for payment of promissory note payable by instalments.

A promissory note payable by instalments must be presented for payment on the third day after the date fixed for payment of each instalment; and non-payment on such presentment has the same effect as non-payment of a note at maturity.

Section 68. Presentment for payment of instrument payable at specified place and not elsewhere.

A promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque made, drawn or accepted payable at a specified place and not elsewhere must, in order to charge any party thereto, be presented for payment at that place.

Section 69. Instrument payable at specified place.

A promissory note or bill of exchange made, drawn or accepted payable at a specified place must, in order to charge the maker or drawer thereof, be presented at the place.

Section 70.- Presentment where no exclusive place specified.

A promissory note or bill of exchange, not made payable as mentioned in section 68 and 69, must be presented for payment at the place of business (if any), or at the usual residence, of the maker, drawee or acceptor thereof, as the case may be.

Section 71. Presentment when maker, etc., has no known place of business or residence.

If the maker, drawee or acceptor of a negotiable instrument has no known place of business or fixed residence, and no place is specified in the instrument for presentment for acceptance or payment such presentment may be made to him in person wherever he can be found.

Section 72. Presentment of cheque to charge drawer.

[Subject to the provisions of section 84] a cheque must, in order to charge the drawer, be presented at the bank upon which it is drawn before the relation between the drawer and his banker has been altered to the prejudice of the drawer.

1. Inserted by Act 6 of 1897, sec. 2

Section 73. Presentment of cheque to charge any other person.

A cheque must, in order to charge any person except the drawer, be presented within a reasonable time after delivery thereof by such person.

Section 74. Presentment of instrument payable on demand.

Subject to the provisions of section 31, a negotiable instrument payable on demand must be presented for payment within a reasonable time after it is received by the holder receives it.

Section 75. Presentment by or to agent, representative of deceased, or assignee of insolvent.

Presentment for acceptance or payment may be made to the duly authorized agent of the drawee, maker or acceptor, as the case may be, or, where the drawee, maker or acceptor has died, to his legal representative, or, where he has been declared an insolvent, to his assignee.

Section 75A. Excuse for delay in presentment for acceptance or payment

1[75A. Excuse for delay in presentment for acceptance or payment

Delay in presentment 2[for acceptance of payment] is excused if the delay is caused by circumstances beyond the control of the holder, and not imputable to his default, misconduct or negligence. When the cause of the delay ceases to operate, presentment must be made within a reasonable time.]

1. Inserted by Act 25 of 1920, sec. 2.

2. Subs. by Act 12 of 1921, sec. 3, for “for payment”

Section 76. When presentment unnecessary.

No presentment for payment is necessary, and the instrument is dishonoured at the due date for presentment, in any of the following cases:

(a) if the maker, drawee or acceptor intentionally prevents the presentment of the instrument, or if the instrument being payable at his place of business, he closes such place on a business day during the usual business hours, or if the instrument being payable at some other specified place, neither he nor any person authorized to pay it attends at such place during the usual business hours, or if the instrument not being payable at any specified place, he cannot after due search be found;

(b) as against any party sought to be charged therewith, if he has engaged to pay notwithstanding non-presentment ;

(c) as against any party if, after maturity, with knowledge that the instrument has not been presented.- he makes a part payment on account of the amount due on the instrument, or promises to pay the amount due therein whole or in part, or otherwise waives his right to take advantage of any default in presentment for payment;

(d) as against the drawer, if the drawer could not suffer damage from the want of such presentment.

Section 77. Liability of banker for negligently dealing with bill presented for payment.

When a bill of exchange, accepted payable at a specified bank, has been duly presented there for payment and dishonoured, if the banker so negligently or improperly keeps, deals with or delivers back such bill as to cause loss to the holder, he must compensate the holder for such loss.

Chapter VI – Of Payment And Interest

Section 78. To whom payment should be made.

Subject to the provisions of section82, clause (c), payment of the amount due on a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque must, in order to discharge the maker or acceptor, be made to the holder of the instrument.

Section 79. Interest when rate specified.

When interest at a specified rate is expressly made payable on a promissory note or bill of exchange , interest shall be calculated at the rate specified, on the amount of the principal money due thereon, from the date of the instrument, until tender or realization of such amount, or until such date after the institution of a suit to recover such amount as the Court directs.

Section 80. Interest when no rate specified.

When no rate of interest is specified in the instrument, interest on the amount due thereon shall, [notwithstanding any agreement relating to interest between any parties to the instrument], be calculated at the rate of [eighteen per centum] per annum, from the date at which the same ought to have been paid by the party charged, until tender or realization of the amount due thereon, or until such date after the institution of a suit to recover such amount as the Court directs.

Explanation.- When the party charged is the endorser of an instrument dishonoured by non-payment, he his liable to pay interest only form the time that he receives notice of the dishonour.

1. Substituted by Act 30, of 1926, sec. 2 for “except in case provided for by the Code of Civil Procedure, section 532″.

2. Substituted by Act 66 of 1988, sec. 2 for ‘six per centum’ (w.e.f. 30-12-1988).

Section 81. Delivery of instrument on payment or indemnity in case of loss

1[(1)] Any person liable to pay, and called upon by the holder thereof to pay, the amount due on a promissory note, but of exchange or cheque is before payment entitled to have it shown, is on payment entitled to have it delivered up to him, or, if the instrument is lost or cannot be produced, to be indemnified against any further claim thereon against him.

2[(2) Where the cheque is an electronic image of a truncated cheque, even after the payment the banker who received the payment shall be entitled to retain the truncated cheque.

(3) A certificate issued on the foot of the printout of the electronic image of a truncated cheque by the banker who paid the instrument, shall be prima facie proof of such payment.]

1. Section 81 renumbered as sub-section (1) thereof by Act 55of 2002, sec. 4 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

2. Inserted by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 4 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Chapter VII – Of Discharge From Liability On Notes, Bills And Cheques

Section 82. Discharge from liability.

The maker, acceptor or indorser respectively of a negotiable instrument is discharged from liability thereon

(a) BY cancellation.-to a holder thereof who cancels such acceptor’s or indorser’s name with intent to discharge him, and to all parties claiming under such holder;

(b) By release- to a holder thereof who otherwise discharges such maker, acceptor or indorser, and to all parties deriving title under such holder after notice of such discharge;

(c) By payment- to all parties thereto, if the instrument is payable to bearer, or has been indorsed in blank, and such maker, acceptor or indorser makes payment in due course of the amount due thereon.

Section 83. Discharge by allowing drawee more than forty-eight hours to accept.

If the holder of a bill of exchange allows the drawee more than [forty eight] hours, exclusive of public holidays, to consider whether he will accept the same, all previous parties not consenting to such allowance are thereby discharged from liability to such holder.

1. Substituted by Act 12 of 1921, sec. 2 for “twenty-four”.

Section 84. When cheque not duly presented any drawer damaged thereby.

(1) Where a cheque is not presented for payment within a reasonable time of its issue, and the drawer or person on whose account it is drawn had the right, at the time when presentment ought to have been made, as between himself and the banker, to have the cheque paid and suffers actual damage through the delay, he is discharged to the extent of such damage, that is to say, to the extent to which such drawer or person is a creditor of the banker to a large amount than he would have been if such cheque had been paid.

(2) In determining what is a reasonable time, regard shall be had to the nature of the instrument, the usage of trade and of bankers, and the facts of the particular case.

(3) The holder of the cheque as to which such drawer or person is so discharged shall be a creditor, in lieu of such drawer or person, of such banker to the extent of such discharge and entitled to recover the amount from him.

Illustrations

(a) A draws a cheque for Rs. 1,000, and, when the cheque ought to be presented, has funds at the bank to meet it. The bank fails before the cheque is presented. The drawer is discharged, but the holder can prove against the bank for the amount of the cheque.

(b) A draws a cheque at Umballa on a bank in Calcutta. The bank fails before the cheque could be presented in ordinary course. A is not discharged, for he has not suffered actual damage through any delay in presenting the cheque.

1. Substituted by Act 6 of 1897, sec. 3 for section 84.

Section 85. Cheque payable to order

1[(1)] Where a cheque payable to order purports to be endorsed by or on behalf of he payee, the drawee is discharged by payment in sue course.

2[(2) Where a cheque is originally expressed to be payable to be payable to bearer, the drawee is discharged by payment in due course to the bearer thereof, notwithstanding any endorsement whether in full or in blank appearing thereon, and notwithstanding that any such endorsement purports to restrict of exclude further negotiation.]

1. Section 85 re-numbered as sub-section. (1) thereof by Act 17 of 1934, sec. 2.

2. Inserted by Act 17 of 1934, sec. 2.

Section 85A. Drafts drawn by one branch of a bank on another payable to order

1[85A. Drafts drawn by one branch of a bank on another payable to order

Where any draft, that is an order to pay money, drawn by one office of a bank upon another office of the same bank for a sum of money payable to order on demand, purports to be endorsed by or behalf of the payee, the bank is discharged by payment in due course.]

1. Inserted by Act 25 of 1930, sec. 2.

Section 86. Parties not consenting discharged by qualified or limited acceptance.

If the holder of a bill of exchange acquiesces in qualified acceptance, or one limited to part of the sum mentioned in the bill, or which substituted a different place or time for payment or which, where the drawees are not partners, is not signed by all the drawees, all previous parties whose consent is not obtained to such acceptance are discharged as against the holder and those claiming under him, unless on notice given by the holder they assent to such acceptance.

Explanation.-An acceptance is qualified

(a) where it is conditional, declaring the payment to be dependent or the happening of an event therein stated;

(b) where it undertakes the payment of part only of the sum ordered to be paid;

(c) where, no place of payment being specified on the order, it undertakes the payment at a specified place, and not otherwise or elsewhere, or where a place of payment being specified in the order, it undertakes the payment at some other place and not otherwise or elsewhere;

(d) where it undertakes the payment at a time other than that at which under the order or would be legally due.

Section 87. Affect of material alteration.

Any material alteration of a negotiable instrument renders the same void as against anyone who is a party thereto at the time of making such alteration and does not consent thereto, unless it was made in order to carry out the common intention of the original parties;

Alteration by endorsee:- And any such alteration, if made by an endorsee, discharges his endorser from all liability to him in respect of the consideration thereof.

The provisions of this section are subject to those of sections 20, 49, 86 and 125.

Section 88. Acceptor or endorser bound notwithstanding previous alteration.

An acceptor or endorser of a negotiable instrument is bound by the acceptance or endorsement notwithstanding any previous alteration of the instrument.

Section 89. Payment of instrument on which alteration is not apparent

1[(1)] Where a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque has been materially altered but does not appear to have been so altered, or where a cheque is presented for payment which does not at the time of presentation appear to be crossed or to have had a crossing which has been obliterated, payment thereof by a person or banker liable to pay an paying the same according to the apparent tenor thereof at the time of payment and otherwise in due course, shall discharge such person or banker liable to pay and paying the same according to the apparent tenor thereof at the time of payment and otherwise in due course, shall discharge such a person or banker from all liability thereon, and such payment shall not be questioned by reasons of the instrument having been altered, or the cheque crossed.

2[(2) Where the cheque is an electronic image of a truncated cheque, any difference in apparent tenor of such electronic image and the truncated cheque shall be a material alteration and it shall be the duty of the bank or the clearing house, as the case may be, to ensure the exactness of the apparent tenor of electronic image of the truncated cheque while truncating and transmitting the image.

(3) Any bank or a clearing house which receives a transmitted electronic image of a truncated cheque, shall verify from the party who transmitted the image to it, that the image so transmitted to it and received by it, is exactly the same.]

1. Section 89 re-numbered as sub-section (1) thereof by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 5 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

2. Ins. by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 5 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 90. Extinguishments of rights of action on bill in acceptor’s hands.

If a bill of exchange which has been negotiated is, at or after maturity, held by the acceptor in his own right, all rights of action thereon are extinguished.

Chapter VIII – Of Notice Of Dishonor

Section 91. Dishonor by non- acceptance.

A bill of exchange is said to be dishonored by non-acceptance when the drawee, or one of several drawee not being partners, makes default in acceptance upon being duly required to accept the bill, or where presentment is excused and the bill is not accepted. Where the drawee is incompetent to contract, or the acceptance is qualified the bill may be treated as dishonored

Section 92. Dishonors by non-payment.

A promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque is said to be dishonored by non-payment when the maker of the note, acceptor of the bill or drawee of the cheque makes default in payment upon being duly required to pay the same.

Section 93. By and to whom notice should be given.

When a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque is dishonored by non-payment, the holder thereof, or some party thereto who remains liable thereon, must given notice that the instrument has been so dishonored to all other parties whom the holder seeks to make severally liable thereon, and to some one of several partied whom he seeks to make jointly liable thereon.

Nothing in this section renders it necessary to give notice to the maker of the dishonored promissory note, or acceptor of the dishonored bill of exchange or cheque.

Section 94. Mode in which notice may be given.

Notice of dishonor may be given to a duly authorized agent of the person to whom it is required to be given, or , where he has died, to his legal representative, or, where he has been declared an insolvent, to his assignee, maybe oral or written, may, if written, be sent by post, and may be in any form, but it must inform the party to whom it is given, either in express terms or by reasonable intendment that the instrument has been dishonored, and in what way, and that he will be held liable thereon, and it must be given within a reasonable time after dishonor, at the place of business or (in case such party has no place of business) at the residence of the party for whom it is intended.

IF the notice is duly directed and sent by post and miscarries, such miscarriage does not render the notice invalid.

Section 95. Party receiving must transmit notice of dishonor.

Any party receiving notice of dishonor must in order to render any prior party liable to himself, give notice of dishonor to such party within a reasonable time , unless such party otherwise receives due notice as provided by section 93.

Section 96. Agent for presentment.

When the instrument is deposited with an agent for presentment, the agent is entitled to the same time to give notice to his principal as if he were the holder giving notice of dishonor, and the principal is entitled to a further like period to give notice of dishonor.

Section 97. When party to whom notice given is dead.

When the party to whom notice of dishonor is dispatched is dead, but the party dispatching the notice is ignorant of his death, the notice is sufficient.

Section 98. When notice of dishonor is unnecessary.

Notice of dishonor is necessary

(a) when it is dispensed with by the party entitled thereto

(b) in order to charge the drawer, when he has countermanded payment

(c) when the party charged could not suffer damage for want of notice

(d) when the party entitled to notice cannot after due search be found, or the party bound to give notice is, for any other reason, unable without any fault of his own to give it.

(e) to charge the drawers, when the acceptors is also a drawer.

(f) in the case of a promissory note which is not negotiable.

(g) when the party entitled to notice, knowing the facts, promise unconditionally to pay the amount due on the instrument.

Chapter IX – No Noting And Protest

Section 99. Noting.

When a promissory note or bill of exchange has been dishonored non-acceptance or non-payment, the holder may cause such dishonor to be noted by a notary public upon the instrument, or upon a paper attached thereto, or partly upon each.

Such note must be made within a reasonable time after dishonor, and must specify the date of dishonor, the reason, if any, assigned for such dishonor, or, if the instrument has not been expressly dishonored, the reason why the holder treats it as dishonored, and the notary’s charges.

Section 100. Protest.

When a promissory note or bill of exchange has been dishonored by non-acceptance or non-payment, the holder may, within a reasonable time, cause such dishonor to be noted and certified by a notary public. Such dishonor to be noted and certified by a notary public. Such certificate is called a protest.

Protest for bitter security.- When the acceptor of a bill of exchange has become insolvent, or his credit has been publicly impeached, before the maturity of the bill, the holder may, within a reasonable time, cause a notary public to demand better security of the acceptor, and on its being refused may, with a reasonable time, cause such facts to be noted and certified as aforesaid. Such certificate is called a protest for better security.

Section 101. Contents of protest.

A protest under section 100mmust contain

(a) either the instrument itself, or a literal transcript of the instrument and of everything written or printed thereupon;

(b) the name of the person for whom and against whom the instrument has been protested;

(c) a statement that payment or acceptance, or better security, as the case may be, has been demanded of such person by the notary public; the terms of his answer, if any, or a statement that he could not be found;

(d) when the note or bill has been dishonored, the place and time of dishonor, and, when better security has been refused, the place and time of refusal;

(e) the subscription of the notary public making the protest;

(f) in the event of an acceptance for honor or of a payment for honor, the name of the person by whom, of the person whom, and the manner in which, such acceptance or payment was offered and effected.

1[A notary public may make the demand mentioned in clause (c) of this section either person or by his clerk or, were authorised by agreement or usage, by registered letter.]

1. Added by Act 2 of 1885, sec. 5.

Section 102. Notice of protest.

When a promissory note or bill of exchange is required by law to be protested; notice of such protest must be given instead of notice of dishonor, in the same manner and subject to the same conditions; but the notice may be given by the notary public who makes the protest.

Section 103. Protest of non-payment after dishonor by non-acceptance.

All bills of exchange drawn payable at some other place than the place mentioned as the residence of the drawee, and which are dishonored by non-acceptance, may, without further presentment to the drawee, be protested for non-payment, in the place specified for payment, unless paid before or at maturity.

Section 104. Protest of foreign bills.

Foreign bills of exchange must be protested for dishonor when such protest is required by the law of the place where they are drawn.

Section 104A. When noting equivalent to protest

1[104A.When noting equivalent to protest

For the purpose of this Act, where a bill of notes is required to be protested within a specified time or before some further proceeding is taken is it sufficient that the bill has been noted for protest before the expiration of the specified time or the taking of the proceeding; and the formal protest may be extended at any time thereafter as of the date of the noting.]

1. Inserted by Act 2 of 1885, sec. 6.

Chapter X – Of Reasonable Time

Section 105. Reasonable time.

In determining what is a reasonable time for presentment for acceptance or payment, for giving notice of dishonor and for noting, regard shall be had to the nature of the instrument and the usual course of dealing with respect to similar instruments; and., in calculating such time, public holidays shall be excluded.

Section 106. Reasonable time of giving notice of dishonor.

If the holder and the party to whom notice of dishonor is give carry on business or live (as the case may be) in different places, such notice is given within a reasonable time if it is dispatched by the next post or on the day next after the day of dishonor.

If the said parties carry on business or live in the same place, such notice is given within a reasonable time if it is dispatched in time to reach its destination on the day next after the day of dishonor.

Section 107. Reasonable time for transmitting such notice.

A party receiving notice of dishonor, who seeks to enforce his right against a prior party, transmits the notice within a reasonable time if he transmits it within the same time after its receipt as he would have had to give notice if he had been the holder.

Chapter XI – Of Acceptance And Payment For Honor And Reference In Case Of Need

Section 108. Acceptance for honour

When a bill of exchange has been noted or protested for non-acceptance or for better security, any person not being a party already liable thereon may, with the consent of the holder, by writing on the bill accept the same for the honour of any party thereto.

1[* * *].

1. Second sentence omitted by Act 2 of 1985, sec. 7.

Section 109. How acceptance for honour must be made

A person desiring to accept for honour must, 1[by writing on the bill under his hand], declare that he accepts under protest the protested bill for the honour of the drawer or of a particular endorser whom he names, or generally for honour 2[* * *].

1. Substituted by Act 2 of 1885, section. 8, for “in the presence of a notary public, subscribe the bill with his own hand, and”.

2. The Words “and such declaration must be recorded by the notary in his register” omitted by Act 2 of 1885, section 8.

Section 110. Acceptance not specifying for whose honor it is made.

Where the acceptance does not express for whose honor it is made for the honor of the drawer.

Section 111. Liability of acceptor for honor.

An acceptor for honor binds himself to all parties subsequent to the party for whose honor he accepts to pay the amount of the bill if the drawee do not; and such party and all prior parties are liable in their respective capacities to compensate the acceptor for honor for all loss or damage sustained by him in consequence of such acceptance.

But an acceptor for honor is not liable to the holder of the bill unless it is presented, or (in case the address given by such acceptor on the bill is a place other than the place where the bill is made payable) forwarded for presentment, not later than the day next after the day of its maturity.

Section 112. When acceptor for honor may be charged.

An acceptor for honor cannot be charged unless the bill has at its maturity been presented to the drawee for payment, and has been dishonored by him, and noted or protested for such dishonor.

Section 113. Payment for honour

When a bill of exchange has been noted or protested for non-payment, any person may pay the same for the honour of any part liable to pay the same; provided that the person so paying 1[or his agent in that behalf] has previously declared before a notary public the party for whose honour he pays, and that such declaration has been recorded by such notary public.

1. Inserted by Act 2 of 1885, Section 9.

Section 114. Right of payer for honor.

Any person so paying is entitled to all the rights in respect of the bill, of the holder at the time of such payment, and may recover from the party for whose honor he pays all sums so paid, with interest thereon and with all expenses properly incurred in making such payment.

Section 115. Drawee in case of need

Where a drawee in case of need is named in a bill of exchange, or in any endorsement thereon, the bill is not dishonored until it has been dishonored by such drawee.

Section 116. Acceptance and payment without protest

A drawee in case of need may accept and pay the bill of exchange without previous protest.

Chapter XII – Of Compensation

Section 117. Rules as to compensation

The compensation payable in case of dishonour of promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque, by any party liable to the holder or any indorsee, shall 1[***] be determined by the following rules:

(a) The holder is entitled to the amount due upon the instrument together with the expense property incurred in presenting, noting and protesting it;

(b) When the person charged resides at a place different from that at which the instrument was payable, the holder is entitled to receive such sum at the current rate of exchange between the two places;

(c) An endorser who, being liable, has paid the amount due on the same is entitled to the amount so paid with interest at 2[eighteen per centum] per annum from the date of payment until tender or realisation thereof, together with all expenses caused by the dishonour and payment.

(d) When the person charged and such endorser resides at different places, the endorser is entitled to receive such sum at the current rate of exchange between the two places;

(e) The party entitled to compensation may draw a bill upon the party, liable to compensate him, payable at sight or on demand, for the amount due to him, together with all expenses properly incurred by him. Such bill must be accompanied by the instrument dishonoured and the protest thereof (if any). If such bill is dishonoured , the party dishonoring the same is liable to make compensation thereof in the same manner as in the case of the original bill.

1. The words figure and brackets “(except in cases provided for by the Code of Civil Procedure’ sections 532)” omitted by Act 30 of 1926, section 3.

2. Substituted by Act 66 of 1988, section 3 for ‘six per centum’ (w.e.f. 30-12-1988).

Chapter XIII – Special Rules  Of Evidence

Section 118. Presumptions as to negotiable instruments of consideration

Until the contrary is proved, the following presumptions shall be made:

(a) of consideration-that every negotiable instrument was made or drawn for consideration, and that every such instrument, when it has been accepted, indorsed, negotiated or transferred, was accepted, indorsed, negotiated or transferred for consideration;

(b) as to date- that every negotiable instrument bearing a date was made or drawn on such date;

(c) as to time of acceptance- that every accepted bill of exchange was accepted within a reasonable time after its date its date and before its maturity;

(d) as to time of transfer.- that every transfer of a negotiable instrument was made before its maturity;

(e) as to order of endorsements – that the endorsements appearing upon a negotiable instrument were made in the order in which they appear thereon;

(f) as to stamps-that a lost promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque was duly stamped;

(g) that holder is a holder in due course – that the holder of a negotiable instrument is a holder in due course; provided that, where the instrument has been contained from its lawful owner, or form any person in lawful custody thereof, by means of an offence or fraud, or for unlawful consideration, the burden of proving that the holder is a holder in due course lies upon him.

Section 119. Presumption on proof of protest

In a suit upon an instrument which has been dishonored, the Court shall, on proof of the protest, presume the fact of dishonor, unless and until such fact is disproved.

Section 120. Estoppels against denying original validity of instrument

No maker of a promissory note, and no drawer of a bill of exchange or cheque, and no acceptor of a bill of exchange for the honor of the drawer shall, on proof of the protest, presume the fact of dishonor, unless and until validity of the instrument as originally made or drawn.

Section 121. Estoppel against denying capacity of payee to endorse

No maker of a promissory note and no acceptor of a bill of exchange or cheque, and no acceptor of a bill of exchange 1[payable to order] shall, in suit thereon by a holder in due course, be permitted to deny the payee’s capacity, at the rate or the note or bill, to endorse the same.

1. Substituted by Act 8 of 1919, sec. 5 for “payable to, or to the order of, a specified person”.

Section 122. Estoppels against denying signature or capacity of prior party

No. endorser of a negotiable instrument shall, in a suit thereon by a subsequent holder, be permitted to deny the signature or capacity to contract to contract of any prior party to the instrument.

Chapter XIV – Of Crossed Cheques

Section 123. Cheque crossed generally

Where a cheque bears across its face an addition of the words “and company” or any abbreviation thereof, between two parallel transverse lines, or of two parallel transverse lines simply, either with or without the words “not negotiable”. That addition shall be deemed a crossing, and the cheque shall be deemed to be crossed generally.

Section 124. Cheque crossed specially

Where a cheque bears across its face an addition of the name of a banker, either with or without the words “not negotiable”, that addition shall be deemed a crossing, and the cheque shall be deemed to be crossed specially, and to be crossed to that banker.

Section 125. Crossing after issue

Where a cheque is uncrossed, the holder may cross it generally or specially.

Where a cheque is crossed generally, the holder may cross it specially.

Where a cheque is crossed generally or specially, the holder may add the words “not negotiable”.

Where a cheque is crossed specially, the banker to whom it is crossed may again cross it specially to another banker, his agent, for collection.

Section 126. Payment of cheque crossed generally

Where a cheque is crossed generally, the banker on whom it is drawn shall not pay it otherwise than to a banker.

Payment of cheque crossed specially.- Where a cheque is crossed specially, the banker on whom it is drawn shall not pay it otherwise than to the banker to whom it is crossed, or his agent for collection.

Section 127. Payment of cheque crossed specially more than once

Where a cheque is crossed specially to more than one banker, except when crossed to an agent for the purpose of collection, the banker on whom it is drawn shall refuse payment thereof.

Section 128. Payment in due course of crossed cheque

Where the banker on whom a crossed cheque is drawn has paid the same in due course, the banker paying the cheque, and (in case such cheque has come to the hands of the payee) the drawer thereof, shall respectively be entitled to the same rights, and be placed in the same position in all respects, as they would respectively be entitled to and placed in if the amount of the cheque had been paid to and received by the true owner thereof.

Section 129. Payment of cheque crossed specially more than once

Any banker paying a cheque crossed generally otherwise than to a banker or a cheque crossed specially otherwise than to the banker to whom the same is crossed, or his agent for collection, being a banker, shall be liable to the true owner of the cheque for any loss he may sustain owing to the cheque having been so paid.

Section 130. Cheque bearing “not negotiable”

A person taking a cheque crossed generally or specially, bearing in either case the words “not negotiable”, shall not have and shall not be capable of giving, a better title to the cheque than that which the person from whom he took it had.

Section 131. Non-liability of banker receiving payment of cheque

A banker who has in good faith and without negligence received payment for a customer of a cheque crossed generally or specially to himself shall not, in case the title to the cheque proves defective, incur any liability to the true owner of the cheque by reason only of having received such payment.

1[2[Explanation I]:- A banker receives payment of a crossed cheque for a crossed cheque for a customer within the meaning of his section notwithstanding that he credits his customer’s accounts with the amount of the cheque before receiving payment thereof].

3[“Explanation II:- It shall be the duty of the banker who receives payment based on an electronic image of a truncated cheque held with him, to verify the prima facie genuineness of the cheque to be truncated and any fraud, forgery or tampering apparent on the face of the instrument that can be verified with due diligence and ordinary care.

1. Added by Act 18 of 1922, sec. 2.

2. Explanation re-numbered as Explanation I thereof by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 6 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

3. Inserted by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 6 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 131A. Application of chapter to drafts

1[131A.Application of chapter to drafts

The provisions of this chapter shall apply to any draft, as defined in section 85A, as if the draft were a cheque.

1. Added by Act 33 of 1947, section 2.

Chapter XV – Of Bills In Sets

Section 132. Set of bills

Bills of exchange may be drawn in parts, each part being numbered and containing a provision that it shall continue payable only so long as the others remain unpaid. All the parts together make a set; but the whole set constitutes only one bill, and is extinguished when one of the parts if a separate bill, would be extinguished.

Exception:- When a person accepts or indorses different parts of the bill in favour of different persons, he hand the subsequent endorsers of each are liable on such part as if it were a separate bill.

Section 133. Holder of first acquired part entitled to all

As between holders in due course of different parts of the same set, he who first acquired title to his part is entitled to the other parts and the money represented by the bill.

Chapter XVI – Of International Law

Section 134. Law governing liability of maker, acceptor or endorser of foreign instrument

In the absence of a contract to the contrary, the liability of the maker of drawer of a foreign promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque is regulated in all essential matters by the law of the place where he made the instrument, and the respective liabilities of the acceptor and endorser by the law of the place where the instrument is made payable.

Illustration

A bill of exchange was drawn by A California where the rate of interest is 25 percent, and accepted by B, payable in Washington where the rate of interest is 6 per cent. The bill is endorsed in 1[India], and is dishonoured. An action on the bill is brought against B in 1[India]. He is liable to pay interest at the rate of 6 per cent, only; but if A is charged as drawer, A is liable to pay interest at the rate of 25 percent.

1. Subs. by Act 3 of 1951, sec. 3 and Sch., for “the State”

Section 135. Law of place of payment governs dishonours

Where a promissory note, bill of exchange or cheque is made -payable in a different place from that in which it is made or endorsed, the law of the place, where it is made payable determines what constitutes dishonour and what notice of dishonour is sufficient.

Illustration

A bill of exchange drawn and endorsed in 1[India], but accepted payable in France, is dishonoured. The endorsee cause it to be protested for such dishonour, and gives notice thereof in accordance with the law of France through not in accordance with the rules herein contained in respect of bills which are no! foreign. The notice is sufficient.

1. Subs. by Act 3 of 1951, sec. 3 and Sch., for “the State”.

Section 136. Instrument made, etc. out of India, but in accordance with the law of India

If a negotiable instrument is made, drawn accepted or endorsed 1[outside India], but in accordance with the 1[law of India] the circumstance that any agreement evidenced by such instrument is invalid according to the law of the country wherein it was entered into does not invalidate any subsequent acceptance or endorsement made thereon 1[within India]

1. The words “out of British India” were successively amended by the A.O. 1948, the A.O. 1950 and Act 3 of 1951, sec. 3 and Sch to read abobe.

Section 137. Presumption as to foreign law

The law of any foreign country 1[* * *] regarding promissory note, bills of exchange and cheques shall be presumed to be the same as that of 2[India], unless and until the contrary is proved.

1. The words “or the State Jammu and Kashmir” omitted by Act 62 of 1956, sec. 2 and Sch.

2. Subs. by Act 3 of 1951, sec. 3 and Sch., for “the State”.

Chapter XVII – Of Penalties In  Case Of Dishonor Of Certain Cheque For Insufficiency Of Funds In The Accounts

Section 138. Dishonour of cheque for insufficiency, etc., of funds in the accounts

1[CHAPTER XVII]

OF PENALTIES IN CASE OF DISHONOUR OF CERTAIN CHEQUES FOR INSUFFICIENCY OF FUNDS IN THE ACCOUNTS

Where any cheque drawn by a person on an account maintained by him with a banker for payment of any amount of money to another person from out of that account for the discharge, in whole or in part, of any debt or other liability, is returned by the bank unpaid, either because of the amount of money standing to the credit of that account is insufficient to honour the cheque or that it exceeds the amount arranged to be paid from that account by an agreement made with that bank, such person shall be deemed to have committed an offence and shall without prejudice to any other provisions of this Act, be punished with imprisonment for 2[“a term which may extend to two year”], or with fine which may extend to twice the amount of the cheque, or with both:

Provided that nothing contained in this section shall apply unless

(a) The cheque has been presented to the bank within a period of six months from the date on which it is drawn or within the period of its validity, whichever is earlier.

(b) The payee or the holder induce course of the cheque, as the case may be, makes a demand for the payment of the said amount of money by giving a notice, in writing, to the drawer, of the cheque, 3[“within thirty days”] of the receipt of information by him from the bank regarding the return of the cheques as unpaid, and

(c) The drawer of such cheque fails to make the payment of the said amount of money to the payee or, as the case may be, to the holder in due course of the cheque, within fifteen days of the receipt of the said notice.

Explanation: For the purpose of this section, “debt or other liability” means a legally enforceable debt or other liability].

OBJECTS AND REASONS OF AMENDING ACT OF 2002

The Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 was amended by the Banking, Public Financial Institutions and Negotiable Instruments Laws (Amendment) Act, 1988 wherein a new Chapter XVII was incorporated for penalties in case of dishonour of cheques due fo insufficiency of funds in the account of the drawer of the cheque. These provisions were incorporated with a view to encourage the culture of use of cheques and enhancing the credibility of the instrument. The existing provisions in the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, namely, sections 138 to 142 in Chapter XVII have been found deficient in dealing with dishonour of cheques, Not only the punishment provided in the Act has proved to be inadequate, the procedure prescribed for the Courts to deal with such matters has been found to be cumbersome. The Courts are unable to dispose of such cases expeditiously in a time bound manner in view of the procedure contained in the Act- (Para 1)

Keeping in view the recommendations of the Standing Committee on Finance and other representations, it has been decided to bring out, inter alia, the following amendments in the Negotiable Instruments, Act, 1881, namely:

(i) to increase the punishment as prescribed under the Act from one year to two years;

(ii) to increase the period for issue of notice by the payee to the drawer from 15 days to 30 days; (Para 4)

1. Inserted by Act 66 of 1988, , sec. 4 (w.e.f. 1-4-1989). Earlier Chapter XVII relating to ” Notaries Public” Inserted by Act 2 of 1985, sec. 10, was replaced by the Notaries Act, 1952 (53 of 1952), sec. 16 (w.e.f. 14-2-1956).

2. Substituted by Act 55 0f 2002, sec. 7 for “a term which may extended to one year” (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

3. Substituted by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 7, for “within Fifteen days” (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 139. Presumption in favour of holder

1[Presumption in favour of holder

It shall be presumed, unless the Contrary is proved, that the holder of a cheque received the cheque of the nature referred to in section 138 for the discharge, in whole or in part, or any debt or other liability].

1. Ins. by Act 66 of 1988, sec. 4 (w.e.f. 1-4-1989).

Section 140. Defence which may not be allowed in any prosecution under section 138

1[Defence which may not be allowed in any prosecution under section 138 It shall not be a defence in a prosecution of an offence under section 138 that the drawer had no reason to believe when he issued the cheque that the cheque may be dishonoured on presentment for the reasons stated in that section].

1. Ins. by Act 66 of 1988, sec. 4 (w.e.f. 1-4-1989)

Section 141- Offences by companies.

1[Offences by companies.

(1) If the person committing an offence under section 138 is a company, every person who, at the time the offence was committed, was in charge of, and was responsible to the company for the conduct of the business of the company, as well as the company, shall be deemed to be guilty of the offence and shall be liable to be proceeded against and proceeded against and punished accordingly];

Provided that nothing contained in this sub-section shall render any person liable to punishment if he proves that the offence was committed without his knowledge, or that he had exercised all due diligence to prevent the commission of such offence.

2[“Provided further that where a person is nominated as a Director of a company by virtue of his holding any office or employment in the Central Government or State Government or a financial corporation owned or controlled by the Central Government or the State Government, as the case may be, he shall not be liable for prosecution under this Chapter.]

(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (1), where any offence under this Act has been committed by a company and it is proved that the offence has been committed with the consent or connivance of, or is attribute to, any neglect on the part of, any director, Manager, secretary, or other office of the company, such director, manager, secretary or other officer shall also be deemed to be guilty of that offence and shall be liable to be proceeded against and punished accordingly. Explanation: For the purpose of this section.

(a) “Company” means any body corporate and includes a firm or other association of individuals; and

(b) “Director”, in relating to a firm, means a partner in the firm.

OBJECTS AND REASONS OF AMENDING ACT OF 2002

The existing provisions in the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, namely, sections 138 to 142 in Chapter XVII have been found deficient in dealing with dishonour of cheques. Not only the punishment provided in the Act has proved to be inadequate, the procedure prescribed for the Courts to deal with such matters has been found to be cumbersome. The Courts are unable to dispose of such cases expeditiously in a time bound manner in view of the procedure contained in the Act

Keeping in view the recommendations of the Standing Committee on Finance and other representations, it has been decided to bring out, inter alia, the following amendments in the Negotiable Instruments, Act, 1881, namely:

(viii) to exempt those directors from prosecution under section 141 of the Act who are nominated as directors of a company by virtue of their holding any office or employment in the Central Government or State Government or a financial corporation owned or controlled by the Central Government, or the State Government, as the case may be;

1. Ins by Act 66 of 1988, sec. 4 (w.e.f. 1-4-1989).

2. Ins. by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 8 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 142. Cognizance of offences

1[Cognizance of offences

Notwithstanding anything contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973 (2 of 1974).

(a) No court shall take cognizance of any offence punishable under section 138 except upon a complaint, in writing, made by the payee or, as the case may be, the holder in due course of the cheque; (b) Such complaint is made within one month of the date on which the cause of action arises under clause (C) of the proviso to section 138:

2[“Provided that the cognizance of a complaint may be taken by the Court after the prescribed period, if the complainant satisfies the Court that he had sufficient cause for not making a complaint within such period.]

(c) No court inferior to that of a Magistrate or a Judicial Magistrate of the first class shall try any offence punishable under section 138].

OBJECTS AND REASONS OF AMENDING ACT OF 2002

Keeping in view the recommendations of the Standing Committee on Finance and other representations, it has been decided to bring out, inter alia, the following amendments in the Negotiable Instruments, Act, 1881, namely:

(iii) to provided discretion to the Court to waive the period of one month, which has been prescribed for taking cognizance of case under the Act;

1. Ins. by Act 66 of 1988, sec. 4 (w.e.f. 1-4-1989).

2. Ins. by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 9 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 143. Power of Court to try cases summarily.

1[143. Power of Court to try cases summarily.

(1) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973 (2 of 1974) all offences under this Chapter shall be tried by a Judicial Magistrate of the first class or by a Metropolitan Magistrate and the provisions of sections 262 to 265 (both inclusive) of the said Code shall, as far as may be, apply to such trials:

Provided that in the case of any conviction in a summary trial under this section, it shall be lawful for the Magistrate to pass a sentence of imprisonment for a term not exceeding one year and an amount of fine exceeding five thousand rupees:

Provided further that when at the commencement of, or in the course of, a summary trial under this section, it appears to the Magistrate that the nature of the case is such that a sentence of imprisonment for a term exceeding one year may have to be passed or that it is, for any other reason, undesirable to try the case summarily, the Magistrate shall after hearing the parties, record an order to that effect and thereafter recall any witness who may have been examined and proceed to hear or rehear the case in the manner provided by the said Code.

(2) The trial of a case under this section shall, so far as practicable, consistently with the interests of justice, be continued from day to day until its conclusion, unless the Court finds the adjournment of the trial beyond the following day to be necessary for reasons to be recorded in writing.

(3) Every trial under this section shall be conducted as expeditiously as possible and an endeavour shall be made to conclude the trial within six months from the date of filing of the complaint.]

1. Section 143 to 147 ins. by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 10 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 144. Mode of service of summons.

1[Mode of service of summons.

(1) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, (2 of 1974) and for the purposes of this Chapter, a Magistrate issuing a summons to an accused or a witness may direct a copy of summons to be served at the place where such accused or witness ordinarily resides or carries on business or personally works for gain, by speed post or by such courier services as are approved by a Court of Session.

(2) Where an acknowledgment purporting to be signed by the accused or the witness or an endorsement purported to be made by any person authorised by the postal department or the courier services that the accused or the witness refused to take delivery of summons has been received, the Court issuing the summons may declare that the summons has been duly served.

1. Section 143 to 147 ins. by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 10 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 145. Evidence on affidavit.

1[Evidence on affidavit.

(1) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, (2 of 1974.) the evidence of the complainant may be given by him on affidavit and may, subject to all just exceptions be read in evidence in any enquiry, trial or other proceeding under the said Code.

(2) The Court may, if it thinks fit, and shall, on the application of the prosecution or the accused, summon and examine any person giving evidence on affidavit as to the facts contained therein.]

1. Section 143 to 147 ins. by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 10 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 146. Bank’s slip prima facie evidence of certain facts.

1[146. Bank’s slip prima facie evidence of certain facts.

The Court shall, in respect of every proceeding under this Chapter, on production of bank’s slip or memo having thereon the official mark denoting that the cheque has been dishonoured, presume the fact of dishonour of such cheque, unless and until such fact is disproved.]

1. Section 143 to 147 ins. by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 10 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

Section 147. Offences to be compoundable.

1[147. Offences to be compoundable.

Notwithstanding anything contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, (2 of 1974.) every offence punishable under this Act shall be compoundable.]

OBJECTS AND REASONS OF AMENDING ACT OF 2002

Keeping in view the recommendations of the Standing Committee on Finance and other representations, it has been decided to bring out, inter alia, the following amendments in the Negotiable Instruments, Act, 1881, namely:

(iv) to prescribe procedure for dispensing with preliminary evidence of the complainant

(v) to prescribe procedure for servicing of summons to the accused or withness by the Court through speed post or empanelled private couriers;

(vi) to provide summary trial of the cases under the Act with a view to speeding up disposal of cases;

(vii) to make the offences under the Act compoundable;

1. Section 143 to 147 ins. by Act 55 of 2002, sec. 10 (w.e.f. 6-2-2003).

SCH1. Schedule

Enactment repealed

[Rep. by Amending Act, 1891 (12 of 1891), sec. 2 and Sch. I.]

INTRODUCTION

In India, there is reason to believe that instrument to exchange were in use from early times and we find that papers representing money were introducing into the country by one of the Mohammedan sovereigns of Delhi in the early part of the fourtheenth century. The word ‘hundi’, a generic term used to denote instruments of exchange in vernacular is derived from the Sanskrit root ‘hund’ meaning ‘to collect’ and well expresses the purpose to which instruments were utilised in their origin. With the advent of British rule in India commercial activities increased to a great extent. The growing demands for money could not be met be mere supply of coins; and the instrument of credit took the function of money which they represented.

Before the enactment of the Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881, the law of negotiable instruments as prevalent in England was applied by the Courts in India when any question relating to such instruments arose between Europeans. When then parties were Hindu or Mohammedans, their personal law was held to apply. Though neither the law books of Hindu nor those of Mohammedans contain any reference to negotiable instruments as such, the customs prevailing among the merchants of the respective community were recognised by the courts and applied to the transactions among them. During the course of time there had developed in the country a strong body of usage relating to hundis, which even the Legislature could not without hardship to Indian bankers and merchants ignore. In fact, the Legislature felt the strength of such local usages and though fit to exempt them from the operation of the Act with a proviso that such usage may be excluded altogether by appropriate words. In the absence of any such customary law, the principles derived from English law were applied to the Indians as rules of equity justice and good conscience.

The history of the present Act is a long one. The Act was originally drafted in 1866 by the India Law Commission and introduced in December, 1867 in the Council and it was referred to a Select Committee. Objections were raised by the mercantile community to the numerous deviations from the English Law which it contained. The Bill had to be redrafted in 1877. After the lapse of a sufficient period for criticism by the Local Governments, the High Courts and the chambers of commerce, the Bill was revised by a Select Committee. In spite of this Bill could not reach the final stage. In 1880 by the Order of the Secretary of State, the Bill had to be referred to a new Law Commission. On the recommendation of the new Law Commission the Bill was re-drafted and again it was sent to a Select Committee which adopted most of the additions recommended by the new Law Commission. The draft thus prepared for the fourth time was introduced in the Council and was passed into law in 1881 being the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 (26 of 1881)